Ricoh SAVIN D0AP Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ricoh Manuals
  4. Printer
  5. SAVIN D0AP
  6. Service manual
Ricoh SAVIN D0AP Service Manual

Ricoh SAVIN D0AP Service Manual

Hide thumbs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/
D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1
SERVICE MANUAL
Rev. 06/09/2021

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Ricoh SAVIN D0AP

Summary of Contents for Ricoh SAVIN D0AP

  • Page 1 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/ D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 SERVICE MANUAL Rev. 06/09/2021...
  • Page 2 It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh USA, Inc. and its member companies. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR PERMISSION OF RICOH USA, Inc.
  • Page 3 Ricoh USA, Inc. Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program. Untrained uncertified users...
  • Page 5 LEGEND COMPANY PRODUCT CODE LANIER RICOH SAVIN D0AP IM 430F IM 430F IM 430F D0C4 IM 430Fb IM 430Fb IM 430Fb D0C5 IM 350F IM 350F IM 350F D0C6 IM 350 IM 350 IM 350 M0BQ P 501 P 501...

  • Page 7: Table Of Contents

    D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ............1-1 1.1 MACHINE CODES & PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION ..........1-1 1.1.1 MAIN MACHINE ....................1-1 1.1.2 OPTIONS ......................1-2 External Options ....................1-2 Internal Options ....................1-2 Controller Options ....................1-3 SD Card Options ....................1-3 2.
  • Page 8 Loading Paper ....................2-25 Connecting the Modular Cable (Only Using the Fax) ......... 2-27 Turning the Power On ..................2-27 Printing a Configuration Page ................2-31 2.4.3 MOVING THE MACHINE ................2-31 2.5 EXTERNAL/ INTERNAL OPTIONS ................2-33 2.6 PAPER FEED UNIT PB1120 (D3ER-17)/ PB1110 (D3EQ-17) ........2-34 2.6.1 NUMBER OF PAPER FEED UNIT THAT CAN BE INSTALLED .....
  • Page 9 2.16.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..............2-84 2.16.3 USER TOOL SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11A/G/N (PRINTER MODEL) ..2-86 2.16.4 USER TOOL SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11A/G/N (MF MODEL) ....2-87 2.16.5 SP MODE SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11 WIRELESS LAN ......2-89 2.17 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE M19 (D3BR-04) ........2-90 2.17.1 ACCESSORIES.....................
  • Page 10 2.26.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..............2-119 2.27 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE M19 (D3BS-03) ......2-121 2.27.1 OVERVIEW ....................2-121 2.27.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN THE PROCEDURE ..........2-121 2.27.3 ACCESSORIES................... 2-122 2.27.4 SEAL CHECK AND REMOVAL ..............2-122 2.27.5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..............2-123 2.27.6 CONFIGURING "AUTO ERASE MEMORY"...
  • Page 11 3.3 PAPER TRANSFER QUALITY STANDARDS ............3-4 4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........4-1 4.1 NOTES ON THE MAIN POWER SWITCH ..............4-1 4.1.1 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE PUSH SWITCH (DC SWITCH) ......4-1 4.1.2 SHUTDOWN METHOD ................... 4-2 4.1.3 FORCED SHUTDOWN ................... 4-3 4.2 GENERAL CAUTIONS ....................
  • Page 12 4.7.1 OPERATION PANEL UNIT ................4-45 4.7.2 INTERNAL PARTS ..................4-50 Bottom Cover ....................4-50 4.8 SPDF (MF MODEL ONLY) ..................4-52 4.8.1 SPDF UNIT ....................4-52 When Installing the SPDF.................. 4-54 4.8.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT .................. 4-55 4.8.3 SPDF FRICTION PAD ................... 4-55 4.8.4 SPDF REAR COVER ..................
  • Page 13 4.14.2 FUSING UPPER COVER ................4-94 4.14.3 FUSING THERMISTOR (TH1) ............... 4-96 4.14.4 FUSING THERMOSTAT (CENTER, END) (TH4, TH3) ........4-96 4.14.5 FUSING LAMP ....................4-96 4.14.6 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER ................4-97 4.14.7 HOT ROLLER ....................4-98 4.14.8 PRESSURE ROLLER .................. 4-101 4.14.9 FUSING THERMOPILE (TH2) ..............
  • Page 14 4.18.1 SCB (MF MODEL) ..................4-135 NVRAM on the SCB ..................4-137 4.18.2 SCB WITH THE CONTROLLER BOX (MF MODEL) ........4-142 4.18.3 HDD (MF MODELS) ..................4-142 4.18.4 FCU BOARD (FAX MODEL) ................ 4-144 4.18.5 SPEAKER (FAX MODEL) ................4-149 4.18.6 CONTROLLER BOARD (PRINTER MODEL) ..........
  • Page 15 5.3.3 UPDATING PROCEDURE (PRINTER MODEL)..........5-7 5.3.4 UPDATING PROCEDURE (MF MODELS)............5-9 5.3.5 ERROR SCREENS DURING UPDATING ............5-13 5.4 PACKAGE FIRMWARE UPDATE................5-21 5.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................5-21 5.4.2 IMMEDIATE UPDATE ..................5-22 5.4.3 UPDATE AT THE NEXT VISIT (RESERVE) ........... 5-24 How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (Reserve) .......
  • Page 16 5.10.3 IMPORTING DEVICE INFORMATION ............5-55 5.10.4 POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS FOR IMPORT/EXPORT PROBLEMS ..... 5-55 5.11 ADDRESS BOOK EXPORT/IMPORT ..............5-58 5.11.1 EXPORT ....................... 5-58 5.11.2 IMPORT ......................5-58 5.11.3 SPECIFICATION ................... 5-59 5.12 CAPTURING THE DEBUG LOGS ..............5-60 5.12.1 OVERVIEW ....................5-60 Security of the Operation Log ................
  • Page 17 Paper Size Codes ..................... 6-78 6.3.3 SENSOR POSITION LAYOUT ............... 6-79 6.4 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT .................... 6-81 6.4.1 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT..............6-81 6.4.2 IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT..............6-82 6.4.3 SCANNER, SPDF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ............. 6-83 Scanner Image Adjustment ................6-83 SPDF Image Adjustment ................... 6-84 6.5 OTHER TROUBLESHOOTING ................
  • Page 18 6.5.26 WHITE SPOTS OCCUR AT LOW TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY ... 6-113 7. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............7-1 7.1 OVERVIEW ....................... 7-1 7.1.1 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH PREDECESSOR MODELS ........................7-1 Printer Model ....................... 7-1 MF Model ......................7-4 7.1.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT .................. 7-7 7.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ....................
  • Page 19 7.5 LED EXPOSURE ..................... 7-33 7.5.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ................7-33 7.5.2 MECHANISM ....................7-33 Writing Method ....................7-33 LED Head ......................7-34 LED Head Cleaning ................... 7-35 Scanner Feedback Control (MF Model Only) ............. 7-36 7.6 PCDU, TONER CARTRIDGE .................. 7-38 7.6.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ................
  • Page 20 Adjustable Cassette ..................7-65 Side-to-side Registration Adjustment in the Machine Paper Tray ....... 7-66 Bypass Paper Feed Operation................7-67 Bypass Tray Paper Detection ................7-68 Side-to-side Registration Adjustment in the Bypass Tray ........7-68 7.10 PAPER EXIT/ DUPLEX ..................7-69 7.10.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ................
  • Page 21 IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES Warnings, Cautions, Notes In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used. A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning could • result in death or serious injury. • A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution could result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other property.
  • Page 22 Safety Prevention of Physical Injury Before disassembling or assembling parts of the machine and peripherals, make sure that the machine and peripheral power cords are unplugged. The plug should be near the machine and easily accessible. Note that some components of the machine and the paper tray unit are supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
  • Page 23 Therefore, when closing the ARDF, please be sure to keep your hands away from the hinges at the back of the ARDF. 18. When using a vacuum cleaner around the machine, keep others away from the cleaner, especially small children. 19.
  • Page 24 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up. The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
  • Page 25 29. Contact a professional industrial waste disposal organization and ask them to dispose of the tank. Lithium Batteries for Taiwan Laser Safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment.
  • Page 26 Safety Instructions for the Color Controller Fuse The color controller uses a double pole fuse. If this fuse blows, be sure to replace it with an identical fuse. Batteries Always replace a battery with the same type of battery prescribed for use with the color controller unit.
  • Page 27 The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license. Firefox and Thunderbird are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
  • Page 28 Internet Explorer® 10 • • Internet Explorer® 11 The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows: The product names of Windows Vista are as follows: • Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium Microsoft®...
  • Page 29 Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 Essentials Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 Datacenter Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 MultiPoint Premium Server Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks. Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

  • Page 31: Product Information

    PRODUCT INFORMATION R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY Pa g e Da t e Ad d e d/ Up da t ed / Ne w None...

  • Page 33: Machine Codes & Peripheral Configuration

    Machine Codes & Peripheral Configuration 1. PRODUCT INFORMATION 1.1 MACHINE CODES & PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION 1.1.1 MAIN MACHINE Machine Product Function Operation PPM (A4/LT Service Activity Code Name Panel SEF) M0BQ P 501 Printer 4-line LCD 43 ppm User maintenance M0D1 P 502 Printer 4-line LCD...

  • Page 34: Options

    Machine Codes & Peripheral Configuration 1.1.2 OPTIONS External Options Item Machine Code Remarks Paper Feed Unit D3ER-17 PB1120 500 sheets Paper Feed Unit D3EQ-17 PB1110 250 sheets Caster Table Type M34 D3EP-03 Offline Stapler Type D3EP-02 (Only NA/EU/AA) Only for MF model (IM 350F/350/430Fb/430F) Handset HS1010 M444-38 (Only NA)

  • Page 35: Controller Options

    Machine Codes & Peripheral Configuration Controller Options Item Machine Code Remarks IEEE1284 Interface Board D3C0-17 Common (MP 402) Type M19 IEEE802.11a/b/g/n Interface M500-08 (Only NA/EU/AA) Common (MP 402) Unit Type M24 File Format Converter Type D3BR-04 Common (MP 402) Only for MF model (IM 350F/350/430Fb/430F) USB Device Server Option D3BC-33 (NA)
  • Page 36 Machine Codes & Peripheral Configuration Item Machine Code Remarks M543-06 (AA/CHN/TWN/KOR) PostScript3 Unit Type M34 D3EN-10 (NA) D3EN-11 (EU) Only for MF model (IM D3EN-12 350F/350/430Fb/430F) (AA/CHN/TWN/KOR) VM Card Type P18 D3EN-03 (NA) D3EN-04 (EU) Only for Printer model (P 501/500) D3EN-05 (AA/CHN/TWN/KOR) FAX Connection Unit Type...

  • Page 37: Installation

    INSTALLATION R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY Pa g e Da t e Ad d e d/ Up da t ed / Ne w None...

  • Page 39: Installation Requirements

    Installation Requirements 2. INSTALLATION 2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT 30. Temperature Range: 10 °C to 32 °C (50 °F to 89.6 °F) 31. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH 32. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight.) 33.

  • Page 40: Machine Space Requirements

    Installation Requirements 2.1.2 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS Printer Model MF Model D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 41: Machine Dimensions

    Installation Requirements 2.1.3 MACHINE DIMENSIONS Printer Model Item mm (inch) Width [A] 375 mm (14.8 inch) (Excluding the fan cover) Height [B] 311 mm (12.2 inch) Depth 412 mm (16.2 inch) MF Model Item mm (inch) Width [A] 476 mm (18.7 inch) Height [B] 510 mm (20.1 inch) Depth...

  • Page 42: Power Requirements

    Installation Requirements 2.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet. • Avoid multi-wiring. • Be sure to ground the machine. • • Never place anything on the power cord. Input voltage level: Destination Power supply voltage Frequency Rated current consumption 120 V to 127 V...

  • Page 43: Main Machine Installation (P 502/501)

    Main Machine Installation (P 502/501) 2.2 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION (P 502/501) The service maintenance model (P 502 (Machine code: M0D1)) is for installation by the customer engineer. The user maintenance model (P 501 (Machine code: M0BQ)) is for installation by users. However, the customer engineer must do the installation if the sales representative requests it.

  • Page 44: Removal Of Packing Materials And Shipping Retainers

    Main Machine Installation (P 502/501) Removal of Packing Materials and Shipping Retainers Do not put anything in the space around the machine, so that you can load paper, replace consumables, and clear paper jams easily. Remove all the adhesive tapes and protective sheet from the outside of the machine. Press the front cover button on the right side of the machine, and then open the front cover.

  • Page 45: Loading Paper

    Main Machine Installation (P 502/501) Pull out the tape straight towards you. Toner adheres to the edge of the tape. Be careful not to touch it. Close the front cover. Loading Paper Pull out the paper tray carefully until it stops. Lift the front side of the tray, and then pull it out of the machine.
  • Page 46 Main Machine Installation (P 502/501) Pinch the lever of the back fence and align it with the paper size. Next, pinch the lever of the right fence and align the right and left fences with the paper size. Before setting the paper, set the side fences. Otherwise skew may occur. Load the paper print side down.

  • Page 47: Turning The Power On

    Main Machine Installation (P 502/501) Lifting the front side of the tray, insert it into the machine, and then push it in carefully until it stops. Turning the Power On Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the machine. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.

  • Page 48: Printing A Configuration Page

    Main Machine Installation (P 502/501) The machine starts up. Following the start screen, the language select screen appears. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the language, and then press the [OK] key. The Installation Settings starts. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete setup. There are "Time Zone Settings", "Date and Time Setting", "Daylight Saving Time", and "Network"...

  • Page 49: Moving The Machine

    Main Machine Installation (P 502/501) 2.2.3 MOVING THE MACHINE It is dangerous to handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so could result in • electric shock. • Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the machine, take care that the power cord is not damaged under the machine.
  • Page 50 Main Machine Installation (IM 350F/350/430F) 2.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION (IM 350F/350/430F) 2.3.1 ACCESSORIES IM 350F (D0C5)/ IM 430F (D0AP) Description Q'ty D0C5-17 D0C5-27 D0AP-21 D0AP-19 D0AP-17 D0AP-27 Power cord Modular cable with ferrite core Ferrite core Sheet - EULA (End User License Agreement) Sheet - Note for Using This Machine Safely Sheet - User Registration Sheet Sheet - Note to the user (Caution for NFC Tag)

  • Page 51: Main Machine Installation (Im 350F/350/430F)

    Main Machine Installation (IM 350F/350/430F) 2.3.2 IMPORTANT NOTICE ON SECURITY ISSUES In order to increase the security of the machine, and to ensure that the customer sets the administrator password, an administrator set/change prompt screen is displayed at the first power-up.
  • Page 52 Main Machine Installation (IM 350F/350/430F) Remove all the narrow tapes and the protective sheet, outside the machine. Press the front cover button on the right side of the machine, and then open the front cover. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 2-14...
  • Page 53 Main Machine Installation (IM 350F/350/430F) Pull out the tape straight towards you. Toner adheres to the edge of the tape. Be careful not to touch it. Close the front cover. Lift the exposure glass cover to remove the inner adhesive tapes (1) and the protective sheet (2).

  • Page 54: Loading Paper

    Main Machine Installation (IM 350F/350/430F) Slide the scanner carriage lock switch toward you. SC120-00 is displayed when the machine is turned ON without scanner carriage unlock. Loading Paper Pull out the paper tray carefully until it stops. Lift the front side of the tray, and then pull it out of the machine.

  • Page 55: Connecting The Modular Cable (Only Using The Fax)

    Main Machine Installation (IM 350F/350/430F) Do not stack paper over the limit mark (the mark in the balloon shown above). Rotate the paper size dial, which is located at the front right of the tray, so that the size and the feed direction of the paper in the paper tray can be seen from the window.

  • Page 56: Turning The Power On

    Main Machine Installation (IM 350F/350/430F) Turning the Power On Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the machine. Connect the power cord to the wall outlet. Press the main power switch. The machine starts up. Following the start screen, the [Program/Change Administrator] screen appears.
  • Page 57 Main Machine Installation (IM 350F/350/430F) Ask your customer to change the login password for Supervisor and Administrator 1 as following. 1. Enter the password, and then press [OK]. 2. Enter the password again for confirming, and then press [OK] to register them. 3.

  • Page 58: Moving The Machine

    Main Machine Installation (IM 350F/350/430F) Printing a Configuration Page After you have installed the machine or options, print the configuration page to check the machine status. Press [User Tools]. Press [Machine Features]. Press [Printer Features]. Press [Configuration Page] on the [List / Test Print] tab. Press [User Tools] on the top right of the screen.
  • Page 59 Main Machine Installation (IM 350F/350/430F) Be sure to check the following: The main power is turned OFF. The power cord is unplugged from the wall outlet. The interface cable is unplugged from the machine. If optional paper feed units are attached, remove them. Lift the machine using the inset grips on both sides of the machine.
  • Page 60 Main Machine Installation (IM 430Fb) 2.4 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION (IM 430FB) This machine (Machine code: D0C4) is for installation by users. However, the customer engineer must do the installation if the sales representative requests it. 2.4.1 ACCESSORIES IM 430Fb (D0C4) Description Q'ty D0C4-17...

  • Page 61: Main Machine Installation (Im 430Fb)

    Main Machine Installation (IM 430Fb) Removal of Packing Materials and Shipping Retainers Hold the inset grips on both sides of the machine with two people as shown above, and slowly lift and move the machine. Lower the machine slowly when positioning it. Do not put anything in the space around the machine, so that you can load paper, replace consumables, and clear paper jams easily.
  • Page 62 Main Machine Installation (IM 430Fb) Press the front cover button on the right side of the machine, and then open the front cover. Pull out the tape straight towards you. Toner adheres to the edge of the tape. Be careful not to touch it.
  • Page 63 Main Machine Installation (IM 430Fb) Lift the exposure glass cover to remove the inner adhesive tapes (1) and the protective sheet (2). Slide the scanner carriage lock switch toward you. SC120-00 is displayed when the machine is turned ON without scanner carriage unlock. Loading Paper Pull out the paper tray carefully until it stops.
  • Page 64 Main Machine Installation (IM 430Fb) Pinch the lever of the back fence and align it with the paper size. Next, pinch the lever of the right fence and align the right and left fences with the paper size. Before setting the paper, set the side fences. Otherwise skew may occur. Load the paper print side down.
  • Page 65 Main Machine Installation (IM 430Fb) Lifting the front side of the tray, insert it into the machine, and then push it in carefully until it stops. Connecting the Modular Cable (Only Using the Fax) Make two loops with the modular cord, and then attach the ferrite core [A] (this step is not needed for NA).
  • Page 66 Main Machine Installation (IM 430Fb) Press the main power switch. The machine starts up. Following the start screen, the language select screen appears. Select the language to use, and then press [Next]. The administrator password setting screen appears. If your customer change the password soon, go to step 6. If you want to skip this screen, go to step 7.
  • Page 67 Main Machine Installation (IM 430Fb) 3. Go to step 8. Press [Set Up Later], and then press [Next] according to the instructions on the screen. The Installation Settings screen appears. Press [X]. The following message is displayed. Uncheck the check box, and then press [OK]. 10.
  • Page 68 Main Machine Installation (IM 430Fb) When [Set Up Later] on the administrator password setting screen in step 5 is selected, forcibly display the administrator password setting screen by the following procedure. After the machine installation, enter the SP mode and execute the SP5-755-001 (Display Setting: Disp Administrator Password Change Scrn).
  • Page 69 Main Machine Installation (IM 430Fb) Printing a Configuration Page After you have installed the machine or options, print the configuration page to check the machine status. Press [User Tools]. Press [Machine Features]. Press [Printer Features]. Press [Configuration Page] on the [List / Test Print] tab. Press [User Tools] on the top right of the screen.
  • Page 70 Main Machine Installation (IM 430Fb) Be sure to check the following: The main power is turned OFF. The power cord is unplugged from the wall outlet. The interface cable is unplugged from the machine. If optional paper feed units are attached, remove them. Lift the machine using the inset grips on both sides of the machine.

  • Page 71: External/ Internal Options

    External/ Internal Options 2.5 EXTERNAL/ INTERNAL OPTIONS New/Common Item Target Link Printer model model Paper Feed Unit Paper Feed Unit PB1120 PB1120 (D3ER-17)/ PB1110 (D3EQ-17) Paper Feed Unit PB1110 Caster Table Type M34 Caster Table Type M34 (D3EP-03) Offline Stapler Type Offline Stapler Type M34 (D3EP-02) Common...

  • Page 72: Paper Feed Unit Pb1120 (D3Er-17)/ Pb1110 (D3Eq-17)

    Paper Feed Unit PB1120 (D3ER-17)/ PB1110 (D3EQ-17) 2.6 PAPER FEED UNIT PB1120 (D3ER-17)/ PB1110 (D3EQ-17) To prevent personal injury or damage to the machine, always use two service technicians on opposite sides of the machine to lift the machine with the inset grips provided on both sides. 2.6.1 NUMBER OF PAPER FEED UNIT THAT CAN BE INSTALLED Up to three paper feed units can be installed with any combination of 250 sheets bank and •...
  • Page 73 Paper Feed Unit PB1120 (D3ER-17)/ PB1110 (D3EQ-17) MF model: Person who install: : User : Customer engineer Use on table Use on the floor 2-35 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 74: Accessories

    Paper Feed Unit PB1120 (D3ER-17)/ PB1110 (D3EQ-17) 2.6.2 ACCESSORIES Description Q’ty Installation Guide Set Sheet EMC Address Decal CHN 10mm Decal CHN Date 40mm 2.6.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE When installing this option, turn the machine power OFF, and unplug the power supply •...
  • Page 75 Paper Feed Unit PB1120 (D3ER-17)/ PB1110 (D3EQ-17) There are three vertical pins on the optional paper feed unit. Align the pins with the holes on the underside of the machine, and then carefully lower the machine. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine. Print the configuration page to confirm that the unit was attached correctly.

  • Page 76: Caster Table Type M34 (D3Ep-03)

    Caster Table Type M34 (D3EP-03) 2.7 CASTER TABLE TYPE M34 (D3EP-03) When installing two or more optional trays on the caster table, it is required to install by the customer engineer. 2.7.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q'ty Installation location Plate A-1 Caster table - Paper feed unit (Front right) Plate A-2 Caster table - Paper feed unit (Front left) Plate B-1...

  • Page 77: Offline Stapler Type M34 (D3Ep-02)

    Offline Stapler Type M34 (D3EP-02) 2.8 OFFLINE STAPLER TYPE M34 (D3EP-02) 2.8.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q'ty Stapler unit cradle Stapler Caution Chart Set Sheet Installation Guide 2.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE To prevent injury from electrical shock or damage to the machine, before installation, always turn the main machine power off, and then unplug the machine power supply cord from the power source.
  • Page 78 Offline Stapler Type M34 (D3EP-02) By using a coin, open the cover on the right side of the machine. Fold outside the parts of the release paper that are not stuck to the double-sided tapes on the back of the staple unit cradle. The adhesion of the release paper is strong, so it cannot be detached once it is affixed.
  • Page 79 Offline Stapler Type M34 (D3EP-02) and then turn the screw until it stops. Pull out the pieces of release paper that were folded outside, and then press the staple unit cradle towards the machine. Support the staple unit cradle with a hand so that it does not move when pulling out the release paper.
  • Page 80 Offline Stapler Type M34 (D3EP-02) Insert the staple unit into the stapler unit cradle. Push the staple unit firmly into the back. Turn the machine’s power on. The power of the offline stapler also turns on. Precautions During Use During repeated use, wait more than 3 sec. between stapling. •...

  • Page 81: Hard Disk Drive Option Type P18 (M543-01)

    Hard Disk Drive Option Type P18 (M543-01) 2.9 HARD DISK DRIVE OPTION TYPE P18 (M543-01) 2.9.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q'ty Hard disk drive Flat cable Power cord Screw Inner cover HDD cover 2.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE To prevent injury from electrical shock or damage to the machine, before installation always, turn the main machine power off, and then unplug the machine power supply cord from the power source.
  • Page 82 Hard Disk Drive Option Type P18 (M543-01) Remove the HDD cover. Loosen the screw by using a coin, and then remove the inner cover. Install the hard disk in the indicated position. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 2-44...
  • Page 83 Hard Disk Drive Option Type P18 (M543-01) Connect the flat cable and power cord to the hard disk. Align the upper protrusions on the hard disk into the notches on the machine, and then fasten the hard disk to the machine with the screw. 2-45 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 84 Hard Disk Drive Option Type P18 (M543-01) Connect the flat cable and power cord to the board of the machine. Insert the two protrusions of the supplied inner cover, and then the lower protrusion, into the notches on the machine. Tighten the screw.
  • Page 85 Hard Disk Drive Option Type P18 (M543-01) Attach the supplied HDD cover. 10. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine. When you switch the power on, a message is displayed indicating that the external hard disk drive will be formatted. 11.

  • Page 86: Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21)

    Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21) 2.10 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M12 (B870-21) 2.10.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q’ty Remarks PCB: MKB Harness (MB to MKB) Harness (MB to MKB) Not used Screws M3x6 Only two used Standoffs Not used Clamp Not used Lock band...

  • Page 87: Installation Procedure

    Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21) 2.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE To prevent injury from electrical shock or damage to the machine, before installation, always turn the main machine power off, and then unplug the machine power supply cord from the power source.
  • Page 88 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21) Remove the right cover [A]. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 2-50...
  • Page 89 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21) Attach PCB: MKB [A]. Connect the harness of PCB: MKB CN3 (13 pin) [A] and to the connector on SCB CN205 [B], and then clamp the harnesses. 2-51 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 90: Accessories

    NFC Card Reader Type M27 (M502-10) 2.11 NFC CARD READER TYPE M27 (M502-10) 2.11.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q'ty NFC card reader USB cable Double-sided tape Decal Cushion Clamp EMC address Caution chart 2.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (1): USB CABLE EXPOSED To prevent injury from electrical shock or damage to the machine, before installation, always turn the main machine power off, and then unplug the machine power supply cord from the power source.
  • Page 91 NFC Card Reader Type M27 (M502-10) (recommended). • If the customer prefers a tidy appearance, follow this alternate Installation Procedure (2) to conceal the USB cable inside the machine (Installation Procedure (2): USB Cable Inside the Machine). Open the SPDF. Remove the platen sheet [A].
  • Page 92 NFC Card Reader Type M27 (M502-10) At the back of the SPDF, slide the small cover [A] up and remove it. If the thickness of the NFC card reader is 15.4 mm or less, set cushion [A] into the hole on the SPDF bottom cover.
  • Page 93 NFC Card Reader Type M27 (M502-10) Connect the USB cable [B] with the ferrite core to the NFC card reader [A]. 10. Firmly fasten the NFC card reader [A] to the SPDF. 11. Route the USB cable [A] between the tabs as shown below. 12.
  • Page 94 NFC Card Reader Type M27 (M502-10) 14. Using the rear, left corner as a reference point set the platen sheet [A] on the exposure glass. 15. Close the SPDF to attach the platen sheet. 16. From small cover [A] remove knock-out [B] to create a slot. 17.
  • Page 95 NFC Card Reader Type M27 (M502-10) 19. Connect the USB cable [A] to the operation panel. 20. Pass the USB cable through the hole, and then attach the side cover [A] of the operation panel. 21. Put the three clamps on the right cover, and then fasten the USB cable [A] with them as shown below.

  • Page 96: Installation Procedure (2): Usb Cable Inside The Machine

    NFC Card Reader Type M27 (M502-10) 23. Attach the decal as shown below. 2.11.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (2): USB CABLE INSIDE THE MACHINE To prevent injury from electrical shock or damage to the machine, before installation always, turn the main machine power off, and then unplug the machine power supply cord from the power source.
  • Page 97 NFC Card Reader Type M27 (M502-10) Release the tab [A] to remove the harness cover [B]. At the back of the SPDF, slide the small cover [A] up and remove it. If the thickness of the NFC card reader is 15.4 mm or less, set cushion [A] into the hole on the SPDF bottom cover.
  • Page 98 NFC Card Reader Type M27 (M502-10) Peel the double-sided tapes [A]. Connect the USB cable [B] with the ferrite core to the NFC card reader [A]. 10. Firmly fasten the NFC card reader [A] to the SPDF. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 2-60...
  • Page 99 NFC Card Reader Type M27 (M502-10) 11. Route the USB cable [A] between the tabs as shown below. 12. Attach the SPDF bottom cover to the SPDF. 13. Attach the harness cover to the SPDF. 14. Using the rear, left corner as a reference point set the platen sheet [A] on the exposure glass.
  • Page 100 NFC Card Reader Type M27 (M502-10) 17. Pass the USB cable through the hole, and then attach the small cover [A]. 18. Remove the side cover [A] of the operation panel. 19. Connect the USB cable [A] to the operation panel. 20.
  • Page 101 NFC Card Reader Type M27 (M502-10) 22. Open the front cover [A] by pressing the front cover button. 23. Open the rear cover [A]. 24. Remove the HDD cover [A] and the connector cover [B] and [C]. Use a flathead screwdriver to remove the connector cover [B]. 2-63 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 102 NFC Card Reader Type M27 (M502-10) 25. Remove the right cover [A]. 26. Fasten the USB cable [A] with four clamps on the machine. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 2-64...
  • Page 103 NFC Card Reader Type M27 (M502-10) 27. Remove the tabs from the right cover [A] to create cutouts. On the rear side, use the small tab. 28. Pass the USB cable through the cutouts, and then attach the right cover [A]. 29.
  • Page 104 NFC Card Reader Type M27 (M502-10) 30. Attach the decal as shown below. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 2-66...

  • Page 105: Page Keeper Type M28 (D3Dq-17)

    Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) 2.12 PAGE KEEPER TYPE M28 (D3DQ-17) This option is only for NA/EU. 2.12.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q’ty Remarks Double-feed sensor: Receiver Ground plate: Receiver Double-feed sensor: Emitter Ground plate: Emitter Tapping Screws: 3x10 Screw: M3x6 Harness: Receiver Long harness Harness: Emitter Short harness...
  • Page 106 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Remove the screw, and then lift up the original tray [B]. Open the SPDF [A], and then release the five tabs of the SPDF rear cover by using a thin screwdriver. Remove the SPDF rear cover [A]. Close the SPDF.
  • Page 107 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Removing the SPDF front cover Open the SPDF top cover [A]. Remove the screw, and then lift up the original tray [B]. Open the SPDF and then release the three tabs of the SPDF front cover [A]. Close the SPDF slightly and then remove the SPDF front cover [A] while releasing the two tabs with a thin screwdriver.
  • Page 108 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Slide the shaft [A] of the original feed unit toward the rear to remove it. Remove the SPDF inner cover [A]. Lift the back of the SPDF inner cover [A] while swinging up the original tray [B], and then slide the SPDF inner cover toward the back of the SPDF unit.
  • Page 109 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Remove the guard [A]. Put the grounding plate [A] on the double-feed sensor (emitter) [B]. Attach the double-feed sensor (emitter) [A] and grounding plate [B] as a set. (Tapping screw: 3x10) Installing the double-feed sensor (receiver) 2-71 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 110 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Disconnect the harness [A] of the SPDF top cover [B] from SPDF relay board (CN5) and then release the clamp. Remove the harness [A] from the harness guide. Remove the SPDF top cover [A]. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 2-72...
  • Page 111 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Remove the five screws and release the four tabs, and then remove the inner cover [A]. Attach the grounding plate [A] and the grounding wire [B] and then insert the grounding wire in the notch. (Tapping Screw: 3x10) Connect the long harness to the double-feed sensor (receiver) [A].
  • Page 112 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Route the harnesses [B]. Reattach the inner cover ( x5), and then reattach the SPDF top cover ( x1). Make sure the SPDF top cover is set correctly so that the two tabs fit into the holes. 10.
  • Page 113 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) Connect the harnesses [A] from the SPDF top cover to the connectors of the SPDF relay board [B] (CN5, CN6). Reattach the covers and original feed unit. When reattaching the SPDF inner cover, make sure that the shaft [A] fits into the groove (this is the shaft of the lock lever for the friction pad on the back side of the cover).
  • Page 114 Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17) After installing the double-feed sensor Connect the power cord and turn ON the main power. Enter the SP mode. Set the SP6-040-001 (Page Keeper: Mount Select) to “1(ON)”. Press [END] twice. Turn the main power OFF and ON. Log in as Administrator.

  • Page 115: Enhanced Security Hdd Option Type M10 (D792-09)

    Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 (D792-09) 2.13 ENHANCED SECURITY HDD OPTION TYPE M10 (D792-09) This option is only for NA/EU. 2.13.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q’ty Remarks Enhanced Security HDD EMC Address 2.13.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE To prevent injury from electrical shock or damage to the machine, before installation always turn the main machine power off, and then unplug the machine power supply cord from the power source.
  • Page 116 Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 (D792-09) Remove the HDD cover [A]. Remove the screw, and open the HDD inner cover [A]. Remove the standard HDD [A] installed on the machine. Separate the standard HDD [A] from the bracket. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 2-78...

  • Page 117: After Installing The Hdd

    Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 (D792-09) Remove the enhanced security HDD from its protective packaging. Fasten the HDD to the bracket. Install the HDD bracket in the controller box. Reassemble the machine. After Installing the HDD Connect the power cord and turn the machine on. A message prompts you to format the hard disk.
  • Page 118 Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 (D792-09) Turn the main power OFF and back ON again after the message tells you formatting is finished. Enter the SP mode. Turn the main power OFF and back ON again. Ask an administrator to register the HDD authentication code in the machine. If the HDD Authentication Code is not registered, the function of the enhanced security HDD is not activated.

  • Page 119: Controller Options

    Controller Options 2.14 CONTROLLER OPTIONS New/Common Item Target Link Printer model model Common IEEE 1284 Interface IEEE 1284 Interface Board Board Type M19 Type M19 (D3C0-17) Common IEEE 802.11 Interface IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Unit Type M24 Type M24 (M500-08) Common File Format Converter File Format Converter Type...

  • Page 120: Ieee 1284 Interface Board Type M19 (D3C0-17)

    IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 (D3C0-17) 2.15 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE M19 (D3C0-17) 2.15.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q'ty IEEE 1284 Interface board FCC document Notes for Users 2.15.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE To prevent injury from electrical shock or damage to the machine, before installation •...
  • Page 121 IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 (D3C0-17) Fully insert the interface board. Confirm that the IEEE 1284 interface board is firmly connected to the controller board. Printer model: MF model: Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly.

  • Page 122: Ieee 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24 (M500-08)

    IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24 (M500-08) 2.16 IEEE 802.11 INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M24 (M500-08) 2.16.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q’ty IEEE 802.11 Interface board Notes for Users EMC address Caution chart 2.16.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE • To prevent injury from electrical shock or damage to the machine, before installation always, turn the main machine power off, and then unplug the machine power supply cord from the power source.
  • Page 123 IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24 (M500-08) MF model: Fully insert the interface board. Confirm that the interface board is firmly connected to the controller board. Printer model: MF model: 2-85 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 124: User Tool Settings For Ieee 802.11A/G/N (Printer Model)

    IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24 (M500-08) Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly. If it is correctly installed, "Wireless LAN" will appear for "Device Connection" on the configuration page.

  • Page 125: User Tool Settings For Ieee 802.11A/G/N (Mf Model)

    IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24 (M500-08) 2412 - 2462 MHz (1 - 11 channels) 5180 - 5240 MHz (36, 40, 44 and 48 channels) (default: 11) In some countries, only the following channels are available: 2412 - 2462 MHz (1 - •...
  • Page 126 IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24 (M500-08) Type] > [Wireless LAN] (Default: Ethernet) Press [Wireless LAN]. Specify the "Communication Mode". Enter the "SSID setting". (The setting is case sensitive.) Specify the "Ad-hoc Channel". You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected. The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries.

  • Page 127: Sp Mode Settings For Ieee 802.11 Wireless Lan

    IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24 (M500-08) 2.16.5 SP MODE SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11 WIRELESS LAN The following SP commands and UP modes can be specified for IEEE 802.11 SP No. Name Function SP5-840-006 Channel MAX Specifies the maximum range of the channel settings for the country.

  • Page 128: File Format Converter Type M19 (D3Br-04)

    File Format Converter Type M19 (D3BR-04) 2.17 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE M19 (D3BR-04) 2.17.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q’ty File Format Converter board Notes for Users 2.17.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE To prevent injury from electrical shock or damage to the machine, before installation •...
  • Page 129 File Format Converter Type M19 (D3BR-04) Fully insert the file format converter. Confirm that the file format converter is firmly connected to the controller board. Tighten the two screws to secure the file format converter. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly.

  • Page 130: Usb Device Server Option Type M19A (D3Bc-33, -34)

    USB Device Server Option Type M19A (D3BC-33, -34) 2.18 USB DEVICE SERVER OPTION TYPE M19A (D3BC-33, -34) 2.18.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q’ty USB cable Interface board Ferrite core Cable ties Ethernet cable is not provided with this option. Interface Board Surface Item Description Switch...

  • Page 131: What Do The Led Indicators Mean

    USB Device Server Option Type M19A (D3BC-33, -34) Item Description Do not use this port with other options. When installing the USB device server option, make sure that the labels 'USB-A' and 'Ethernet' are upside down. What Do the LED Indicators Mean? When the USB device server option is correctly installed and recognized by the main machine, the LED indicators light up under the following conditions.
  • Page 132 USB Device Server Option Type M19A (D3BC-33, -34) MF model: Fully insert the interface board. Confirm that the interface board is firmly connected to the controller board. Printer model: D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 2-94...
  • Page 133 USB Device Server Option Type M19A (D3BC-33, -34) MF model: Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board. Connect the USB cable to the USB port (Type A) [A] of the USB Device Server Option. Connect the USB cable to the USB port (Type B) [B] of the machine I/F. Printer model: MF model: 2-95...
  • Page 134 USB Device Server Option Type M19A (D3BC-33, -34) Loop the cable at a point 3 cm (approximately 1.2 inches) [A] from each end of the Ethernet cable, and attach the ferrite cores to the cable (For North America only) Bind both cores with cable ties [A] as shown below. Insert the Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port on this option.
  • Page 135 USB Device Server Option Type M19A (D3BC-33, -34) MF model: Insert the other end of the Ethernet cable to a PC for network settings. 10. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine. Do not unplug the USB cable while the machine is trying to identify the USB •...

  • Page 136: Notes For Energy Save Mode Setting

    USB Device Server Option Type M19A (D3BC-33, -34) Use "RX" + the option’s MAC address and access a web browser. Example: http://RX0080926A3264 Ping "RX" + "MAC address" from the command prompt on a windows PC which is on the same network as the mainframe. When installing the USB Device Server Option Type M19A, the installation status is not shown on the Configuration Page.

  • Page 137: Ip Address Setting

    USB Device Server Option Type M19A (D3BC-33, -34) 2.18.3 IP ADDRESS SETTING This section describes how to manually specify an IP address for the USB device server option. Note that you can specify an IP address not only on the same network segment but also on a different network segment.
  • Page 138 USB Device Server Option Type M19A (D3BC-33, -34) Input the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask] and [Default Gateway]. 10. Specify other items if needed. 11. Press [Set] 12. Close the web browser. 13. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the PC. 14. Connect the Ethernet cable to a network device (such as a switching hub). 15.

  • Page 139: Extended Usb Board Type M19 (D3Bs-01)

    Extended USB Board Type M19 (D3BS-01) 2.19 EXTENDED USB BOARD TYPE M19 (D3BS-01) 2.19.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q’ty Extended USB board 2.19.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE • To prevent injury from electrical shock or damage to the machine, before installation always, turn the main machine power off, and then unplug the machine power supply cord from the power source.
  • Page 140 Extended USB Board Type M19 (D3BS-01) Fully insert the interface board. Confirm that the interface board is firmly connected to the controller board. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly.

  • Page 141: Sd Card Options

    SD Card Options 2.20 SD CARD OPTIONS New/Common Item Target Link Printer model model XPS Direct Print XPS Direct Print Option Type Option Type P18 P18 (M543-11)/ M34 (D3EN-18, -19, -20) XPS Direct Print Option Type M34 IPDS Unit Type P18 IPDS Unit Type P18 (M543-07, IPDS Unit Type M34 -08, -09)/ M34 (D3EN-13, -14, -15)

  • Page 142: Sd Card Appli Move

    SD Card Appli Move 2.21 SD CARD APPLI MOVE 2.21.1 OVERVIEW There are only two SD card slots (one of them is a service slot). However, if multiple SD card applications are merged, three or more SD card applications can be used simultaneously.

  • Page 143: Move Exec

    SD Card Appli Move 2.21.3 MOVE EXEC "Move Exec" (SP5-873-001) lets you move application programs from the original SD card to another SD card. • Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the machine.

  • Page 144: Undo Exec

    SD Card Appli Move 2.21.4 UNDO EXEC "Undo Exec" (SP5-873-002) lets you move application programs from an SD card in SD Card Slot 1 (upper) back to the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 (lower). You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).

  • Page 145: Xps Direct Print Option Type P18 (M543-11)/ M34 (D3En-18, -19, -20)2-107 2.22.1 Accessories

    XPS Direct Print Option Type P18 (M543-11)/ M34 (D3EN-18, -19, -20) 2.22 XPS DIRECT PRINT OPTION TYPE P18 (M543-11)/ M34 (D3EN-18, -19, -20) 2.22.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q'ty XPS Direct Print SD card 2.22.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE To prevent injury from electrical shock or damage to the machine, before installation always, turn the main machine power off, and then unplug the machine power supply cord from the power source.
  • Page 146 XPS Direct Print Option Type P18 (M543-11)/ M34 (D3EN-18, -19, -20) 2. Insert the SD card into the upper slot. Printer model: MF model: 3. Attach the SD card slot cover and fasten it. Printer model: D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 2-108...
  • Page 147 XPS Direct Print Option Type P18 (M543-11)/ M34 (D3EN-18, -19, -20) 4. MF model: 5. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine 6. Confirm that the SD card was installed correctly. Printer model: The name of the installed emulation card appears in the [Prioritize Emulation/Program] of [System Settings].

  • Page 148: Ipds Unit Type P18 (M543-07, -08, -09)/ M34 (D3En-13, -14, -15)

    IPDS Unit Type P18 (M543-07, -08, -09)/ M34 (D3EN-13, -14, -15) 2.23 IPDS UNIT TYPE P18 (M543-07, -08, -09)/ M34 (D3EN-13, -14, -15) 2.23.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q'ty IPDS Unit SD card 2.23.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE To prevent injury from electrical shock or damage to the machine, before installation always, turn the main machine power off, and then unplug the machine power supply cord from the power source.
  • Page 149 IPDS Unit Type P18 (M543-07, -08, -09)/ M34 (D3EN-13, -14, -15) MF model: 2. Insert the SD card into the upper slot. Printer model: MF model: 3. Attach the SD card slot cover and fasten it. 2-111 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 150 IPDS Unit Type P18 (M543-07, -08, -09)/ M34 (D3EN-13, -14, -15) Printer model: MF model: 4. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine 5. Confirm that the SD card was installed correctly. Printer model: The name of the installed emulation card appears in the [Prioritize Emulation/Program] of [System Settings].

  • Page 151: Ocr Unit Type M13 (D3Ac-23, -24, -25)

    OCR Unit Type M13 (D3AC-23, -24, -25) 2.24 OCR UNIT TYPE M13 (D3AC-23, -24, -25) 2.24.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q’ty OCR Unit SD card 2.24.2 OVERVIEW OF SEARCHABLE PDF FUNCTION This option adds a searchable PDF function to the scanner function. With this option, OCR is performed on a document read with the scanner, and text data is •...
  • Page 152 OCR Unit Type M13 (D3AC-23, -24, -25) Loosen the screw and remove the SD card slot cover. Insert the SD card into the upper slot. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine. Enter the SP mode, and then press "Enter" in SP5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR Dictionary).

  • Page 153: Recovery Procedure

    OCR Unit Type M13 (D3AC-23, -24, -25) You will need the original SD card in case the HDD unit ever fails. • Attach the SD card slot cover and fasten it. 10. Turn on the machine. 11. Press [File Format / File Name] on the scanner function screen. 12.

  • Page 154: Postscript3 Unit Type P18 (M543-04, -05, -06)/ M34 (D3En-10, -11, -12)2-116 2.25.1 Accessories

    Postscript3 Unit Type P18 (M543-04, -05, -06)/ M34 (D3EN-10, -11, -12) 2.25 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE P18 (M543-04, -05, -06)/ M34 (D3EN-10, -11, -12) 2.25.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q'ty Postscript3 Unit SD card Decal: PS3 2.25.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE To prevent injury from electrical shock or damage to the machine, before installation always, turn the main machine power off, and then unplug the machine power supply cord from the power source.
  • Page 155 Postscript3 Unit Type P18 (M543-04, -05, -06)/ M34 (D3EN-10, -11, -12) MF model: 2. Insert the SD card into the upper slot. Printer model: MF model: 3. Attach the SD card slot cover and fasten it. 2-117 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 156 Postscript3 Unit Type P18 (M543-04, -05, -06)/ M34 (D3EN-10, -11, -12) Printer model: MF model: 4. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine 5. Confirm that the SD card was installed correctly. Printer model: The name of the installed emulation card appears in the [Prioritize Emulation/Program] of [System Settings].

  • Page 157: Vm Card Type P18 (D3En-03, -04, -05)

    VM Card Type P18 (D3EN-03, -04, -05) 2.26 VM CARD TYPE P18 (D3EN-03, -04, -05) 2.26.1 ACCESSORIES Description Q'ty Java-VM SD card 2.26.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE To prevent injury from electrical shock or damage to the machine, before installation always, turn the main machine power off, and then unplug the machine power supply cord from the power source.
  • Page 158 VM Card Type P18 (D3EN-03, -04, -05) 2. Insert the SD card into the lower slot. 3. Attach the SD card slot cover and fasten it. 4. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the machine 5. Confirm that the SD card was installed correctly. [JavaTM] appears when you press the [Switch Functions] key.

  • Page 159: Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M19 (D3Bs-03)

    Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M19 (D3BS-03) 2.27 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE M19 (D3BS-03) 2.27.1 OVERVIEW This option should be installed only for the customer who requires the CC certified Data Overwrite Security function. The machine’s hard disk stores all document data from the Copier, Printer, and Scanner functions.

  • Page 160: Accessories

    Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M19 (D3BS-03) 2.27.3 ACCESSORIES Description Q’ty SD card Comments Sheet Operating Instructions CD-ROM 2.27.4 SEAL CHECK AND REMOVAL Check the factory seals on the box and make sure the tamper proof seals are not broken and the box unopened.

  • Page 161: Installation Procedure

    Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M19 (D3BS-03) 2.27.5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE To prevent injury from electrical shock or damage to the machine, before installation always, turn the main machine power off, and then unplug the machine power supply cord from the power source.
  • Page 162 Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M19 (D3BS-03) Turn the machine on. Enter the SP mode. Do this step only if you are installing the option on a machine that is already in use (not a new machine): If the customer wishes to continue using the same hard disk, execute all three SP •...

  • Page 163: Configuring "Auto Erase Memory" (Performed By The Customer)

    Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M19 (D3BS-03) 2.27.6 CONFIGURING "AUTO ERASE MEMORY" (PERFORMED BY THE CUSTOMER) Refer to "Using Auto Erase Memory (MF Model)". 2-125 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 164: Security Settings

    Security Settings 2.28 SECURITY SETTINGS 2.28.1 SECURITY FUNCTION INSTALLATION The machine contains the Security functions (Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit) in the controller board. If you are installing a new machine, it is recommended that you activate Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption by selecting "Format All Data"...

  • Page 165: Data Overwrite Security

    Security Settings 2.28.2 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY Before You Begin the Procedure Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at their factory defaults. (1) Supervisor login password (2) Administrator login name (3) Administrator login password If any of these settings are at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure.

  • Page 166: Using Auto Erase Memory (Mf Model)

    Security Settings Select [Security Options], and then press the [OK] key. Select [Auto Erase Memory Setting], and then press the [OK] key. Select [On]. Press the selection key beneath [HDDErase], and then select the method of overwriting as follows: Method of Description overwriting Temporary data is overwritten twice with random numbers and once with...
  • Page 167 Security Settings Press [Auto Erase Memory Setting]. Press [On]. Select the method of overwriting. Method of Description overwriting Temporary data is overwritten twice with random numbers and once with zeros. Each item of data is overwritten by a random number, then by its complement, then by another random number, and is then verified.

  • Page 168: Hdd Encryption

    Security Settings overwriting. The icon [2] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten. Icon This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten and blinks during overwriting. Icon This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten. 2.28.3 HDD ENCRYPTION Before You Begin the Procedure: Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values:...

  • Page 169: Enable Encryption Setting (Printer Model)

    Security Settings [Administrator Authentication Management] > [Admin. Authentication] > [On] 2. Select the settings to manage from "Available Settings". [User Tools] > [Machine Features] > [System Settings] > [Administrator Tools] > [Administrator Authentication Management] > [Available Settings] If these settings are disabled, ask the customer these settings must be enabled before you do the installation procedure.

  • Page 170: Enable Encryption Setting (Mf Model)

    Security Settings encryption key, and then press the [Exit] key. Press [Exit]. Log out. 10. Power cycle the machine. The machine will start to convert the data on the memory. Wait until the message "Memory conversion complete. Turn the main power switch off." appears, and then turn the machine off again.
  • Page 171 Security Settings Press [Encrypt]. Select the data to be carried over to the HDD and not be reset. To carry all of the data over to the HDD, select [All Data]. To carry over only the machine settings data, select [File System Data Only]. To reset all of the data, select [Format All Data].

  • Page 172: Backing Up The Encryption Key (Printer Model)

    Security Settings 12. Press [Exit]. 13. Log out. 14. Power cycle the machine. The machine will start to convert the data on the memory. Wait until the message "Memory conversion complete. Turn the main power switch off." appears, and then turn the machine off again.

  • Page 173: Backing Up The Encryption Key (Mf Model)

    Security Settings Backing Up the Encryption Key (MF Model) The encryption key can be backed up. Select whether to save it to an SD card or to print it. The encryption key is required for data recovery if the machine malfunctions. Be sure to store the encryption key safely for retrieving backup data.

  • Page 174: Encryption Key Restoration

    Security Settings Encryption Key Restoration How to restore the old encryption key to the machine The following message appears after the controller board is replaced. In such a case, it is necessary to restore the encryption key to the new controller board. To do this, follow the procedure below.
  • Page 175 Security Settings Encrypted data will be deleted. • • User settings will be cleared. Prepare an SD card. Create a directory named “restore_key” inside the root directory of the SD card. Then, save the “nvram_key.txt” file using the following name: /restore_key/nvram_key.txt Create a text file and write "nvclear".
  • Page 176 Security Settings SP5-846-046 (UCS Setting: Addr Book Media) • Displays the slot number where an address book data is in. • 0: Unconfirmed • 1: SD Slot 1 • 2: SD Slot 2 • 3: SD Slot 3 4: USB Flash ROM •...

  • Page 177: Settings For @Remote Service

    Settings for @Remote Service 2.29 SETTINGS FOR @REMOTE SERVICE Prepare and check the following before you visit the customer site. For details, ask the • @Remote key person. 2.29.1 POINTS TO CHECK BEFORE MAKING @REMOTE SETTINGS The setting of SP5-816-201 in the machine must be "0". Print the SMC with SP5-990-002 and then check if a device ID2 (SP5-811-003) must be correctly programmed.

  • Page 178: Execute The @Remote Settings

    Settings for @Remote Service Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise, the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed. • SP5-811-003 (Machine No. Setting: ID2 Code Display) Sets the ID-2 code used to identify the @remote device at installation. SP5-816-062 (Remote Service: Use Proxy) •...
  • Page 179 Settings for @Remote Service Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround Succeeded Request number error Check the request number again. Communication error (proxy Check the network condition. enabled) Communication error (proxy Check the network condition. disabled) Proxy error (authentication error) Check Proxy username and password. Other error See "SP5816-208 Error Codes"...
  • Page 180 Settings for @Remote Service Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround Low power supply current unplugged modem Busy line Exit the SP mode. SP5-816-208 Error Codes Caused by Operation Error, Incorrect Setting Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround -12002 An Inquiry or registration attempted without Obtain a Request Number before acquiring a request number.
  • Page 181 Settings for @Remote Service Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround -2396 Mainframe ID for external RCG is illegal. -2397 Incorrect ID2 format Check the ID2 of the machine. -2398 Incorrect request number format Check the request number. SP descriptions SP5-816-202 (Remote Service: Letter Number) •...

  • Page 182: Auto Remote Firmware Update (Arfu) Settings

    Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU) Settings 2.30 AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE (ARFU) SETTINGS Specify ARFU settings as required. Operating Conditions: ARFU requires an Internet connection. Be sure to get permission from the customer • before setting ARFU up. Otherwise, it may cause an incident. •...
  • Page 183 Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU) Settings Check if one of the following messages appears: "Will you download the latest package Ver *** and update?" or "The installed package is the latest version.". If the message appears, it is possible to execute ARFU. Press “No” and close SP mode to complete the configuration.
  • Page 184 Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU) Settings Troubleshooting: If error code 71: [Network connection error] appears If error code 71: [Network connection error] appears when you click [Firmware Update] > [Update] > [Execute update] in SP mode, check the following. 4-1. IPv4 address, Subnet mask of the machine and Gateway IPv4 address •...
  • Page 185 Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU) Settings How to find the IP address: Ask the customer to tell you the IP address of the DNS server. If the customer does not know it, ask the customer to check the IP address by one of the following ways: 1.
  • Page 186 Conditions 1) Customer uses RC Gate Type BN1. RC Gate Type BN1 does not support 2048 bit encryption level communication with Ricoh devices (HTTPS Managed device). Therefore, the device cannot be registered under RC Gate Type BN 1.

  • Page 187: Specifying The Time And Day Of The Week To Prohibit Updating

    Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU) Settings Advise your customer to change to the latest appliance that supports 2048 bit encryption level communication. For Condition 2: 1. Manage the device with embedded RC Gate (2048 bit) 2. Exclude non-supported devices (i.e., those devices that cannot be changed from 512-bit to 2048-bit) from the external appliances, then change the encryption level of external appliances and all managed devices (from 512 bit to 2048 bit).
  • Page 188 Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU) Settings Click "Auto Firmware Update". Turn the main power OFF and back ON again after setting SP5-886-111 (AutoUpdateSetting) to "1 (ON)". "Auto Firmware Update" will appear in the menu list of Web Image Monitor. Specify the times and days of the week to prohibit updating. Select the check boxes of the applicable days of the week to prohibit updating on that day.

  • Page 189: Instructions For The Customers

    Instructions for the Customers 2.31 INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CUSTOMERS Provide instructions on the following matters to customers. For detailed procedures, see the user manuals. Operating the printer/copier/scanner/fax functions • • Loading paper and other consumables Operating the main power switch •...

  • Page 190: Remoteconnect Support Settings (Mf Model Only)

    RemoteConnect Support Settings (MF Model Only) 2.32 REMOTECONNECT SUPPORT SETTINGS (MF MODEL ONLY) 2.32.1 OVERVIEW The RemoteConnect Support function allows monitoring and remote control of the customer’s machine’s control panel. Allow a customer support operator to remotely connect with client's machine equipped with •...
  • Page 191 RemoteConnect Support Settings (MF Model Only) Select "Application Settings". Select "Settings" in "RemoteSupportService" and check "Service availability". The setting is located in RemoteSupportService. However, the name of settings menu is RemoteConnect Support settings, You can find “RemoteConnectSupport” in the applications list, however, it does not have any settings, be sure to open the settings of “RemoteSupportService”.
  • Page 192 RemoteConnect Support Settings (MF Model Only) If setup was done correctly, four digits will be displayed on the panel. Press the Exit key. If the setup was not done correctly, the four digits will not be displayed. RemoteConnect Service needs an Internet connection, so the following error message might appear after long-pressing the status bar if an Internet connection is not detected.

  • Page 193: Uninstalling Remoteconnect Support

    RemoteConnect Support Settings (MF Model Only) 2.32.3 UNINSTALLING REMOTECONNECT SUPPORT Some customers might ask for this feature to be disabled because of security precautions. In many cases, disabling RemoteConnect Support should be sufficient. However, if a customer asks for RemoteConnect Support to be completely uninstalled, remove it by conducting the following procedure: Log in to Screen SP mode.

  • Page 194: Remote Panel Operation Settings (Mf Model Only)

    Remote Panel Operation Settings (MF Model Only) 2.33 REMOTE PANEL OPERATION SETTINGS (MF MODEL ONLY) 2.33.1 OVERVIEW Remote Panel Operation is a built-in function. Using Web Image Monitor, you can view on your computer screen the operation panels of devices on the same network as well as remotely control such devices. For example, in a large company, the machine administrator can use the remote control to check for errors, operate machines, and change settings to provide support and manage machines easily.

  • Page 195: How To Enable/Disable Remote Panel Operation/Monitoring2-157

    Remote Panel Operation Settings (MF Model Only) Start-Up Log in to Web Image Monitor as the administrator. Click [Device Management] > [Remote Panel Operation] Notes When connected by the Remote Panel Operation function, the machine does not • automatically switch to Sleep mode, and the Auto Logout and System Auto Reset functions do not operate.
  • Page 196 Remote Panel Operation Settings (MF Model Only) Press "Basic Settings for Extended Devices". Press "Remote Panel Operation". Enable “Remote Operation/Monitoring Functions”. • “Remote Operation/Monitoring” Functions is disabled by default. When it is disabled, Remote Panel Operation is not displayed in the Web Image Monitor. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 2-158...

  • Page 197: Preventive Maintenance

    PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY Pa g e Da t e Ad d e d/ Up da t ed / Ne w None...

  • Page 199: Preventive Maintenance Tables

    Preventive Maintenance Tables 3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES See "Appendices" for the following information: Preventive Maintenance • D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 200: Image Quality Standards

    Image Quality Standards 3.2 IMAGE QUALITY STANDARDS Engine Item Specification Remarks Assured Image Leading edge: 4.2 mm Area Left/Right: 4.2 mm Trailing edge: 4.2 mm Magnification Error Main: ± 0.75% or less Sub: • In an office environment: ± 0.75% or less In other environments: ±...
  • Page 201 Image Quality Standards Item Specification Remarks Reduction: Min 2.8 × M lines /mm or more Assured Image Leading edge: 4.2 mm Area Left/Right: 4.2 mm Trailing edge: 4.2 mm Magnification Error 100%/Reduced-size/Enlarged-size Not applicable when using Main: ± 1.25% or less the SPDF Sub: •...

  • Page 202: Paper Transfer Quality Standards

    Paper Transfer Quality Standards 3.3 PAPER TRANSFER QUALITY STANDARDS Engines Item Specification Remarks Margin Single Side: position Main Scan: 0 ± 2.5 mm Sub Scan: 0 ± 2.0 mm Duplex: Main Scan: 0 ± 2.5 mm Sub Scan: 0 ± 2.0 mm Skew Single Side: Not applicable to paper fed from the bypass...

  • Page 203: Replacement And Adjustment

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY Pa g e Da t e Ad d e d/ Up da t ed / Ne w 86 ∼ 87 03/22/2020 Added ID Chip Connectors 137 ∼...

  • Page 205: Notes On The Main Power Switch

    Notes on the Main Power Switch 4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 4.1 NOTES ON THE MAIN POWER SWITCH The main power button of this machine has been changed to a push-button switch (push button) from the conventional rocker switch. The push switch has characteristics and specifications different from the rocker switch.

  • Page 206: Shutdown Method

    Notes on the Main Power Switch resumption of power, the machine will start up automatically. In rare cases, when you reconnect the AC power cord to a power outlet, the machine does not start automatically. In this case, the machine has not failed. The cause is due to the timing of releasing the residual charge.

  • Page 207: Forced Shutdown

    Notes on the Main Power Switch How to start from shutdown To start the machine, press the main power switch. However, if you press the main power switch between the beginning and the end of a shutdown, the machine will not start. 4.1.3 FORCED SHUTDOWN In case normal shutdown does not complete for some reason, the machine has a forced shutdown function.

  • Page 208: General Cautions

    General Cautions 4.2 GENERAL CAUTIONS Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord. • After replacement, make sure that all removed harnesses are connected again and • secured in their clamps. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 209: Special Tools And Lubricants

    Special Tools and Lubricants 4.3 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS Part Description Q’ty Unique or Notes Number Common VSSG9006 MOLYKOTE(R) G-1077 (Locations to Apply GREASE 50G (General) Grease) VSSG0006 DRYSURF MDF-2400 25G Quick drying grease (General) (Locations to Apply Quick Drying Grease) A2579300 GREASE-BARRIERTA-S552R...

  • Page 210: Locations To Apply Grease

    Special Tools and Lubricants 4.3.1 LOCATIONS TO APPLY GREASE Drum Drive Drum Motor Apply grease to the drum motor as shown below. Location Part name Note Drum motor shaft DC BRUSHLESS MOTOR:DRUM:26W Apply 5 mm to shaft tip. Drum motor peen BRACKET:DRIVE:MOTOR:PEEN Apply 5 mm to shaft tip.
  • Page 211 Special Tools and Lubricants Drum Motor Unit Apply grease in the drum motor unit as shown below. Location Part name Note Drum motor unit peen BRACKET:DRIVE:DRUM:PEEN Apply 5 mm to shaft tip. Drum motor unit gear teeth GEAR:DRIVE:DRUM 3 places May also be applied to opposing gear [E] (GEAR: DRIVE: DRUM shaft instead of [D].

  • Page 212: Paper Feed Drive

    Special Tools and Lubricants Paper Feed Drive Gear Unit Apply silent grease to the gear unit at the locations shown below. Location Part name Note Gear unit HOUSING:DRIVE:PAPER FEED:ASS'Y 2 places. Apply 10 mm to housing shaft tip. HOUSING:DRIVE:PAPER FEED:ASS'Y Apply 10 mm to shaft tip.
  • Page 213 Special Tools and Lubricants Coating Amt. Maximum Minimum Main Unit Side Plates Apply silent grease to the main unit side plates at the locations shown below. Location Part name Note [H] The crimped shaft of the main SIDE 3 places. Apply 5 mm to unit side plate PLATE:RIGHT:500:PEEN shaft tip.

  • Page 214: Feed/Fusing Drive

    Special Tools and Lubricants Feed/Fusing Drive Feed/fusing Motor Unit Apply silent grease to the feed/fusing motor (M4) at the locations shown below. Location Part name Note Feed/fusing motor unit GEAR:DRIVE:FUSING:NO.5 gears Feed/fusing motor GEAR:DRIVE:TRANSPORT:NO.1 gears [C] Feed/fusing motor BRACKET:DRIVE:FUSING:MOTOR:PEEN 2 places. Apply 5 mm peen tip to shaft tip.
  • Page 215 Special Tools and Lubricants Coating Amt. Maximum Minimum Main Unit Side Plates Apply silent grease to the main unit side plates at the locations shown below. Location Part name Note [E] Main unit side plate SIDE 4 places. Apply 5 mm to shaft peens PLATE:RIGHT:500:PEEN tip.

  • Page 216: Fusing Pressure/Release Motor Drive

    Special Tools and Lubricants Coating Amt. Maximum Minimum Fusing Pressure/Release Motor Drive Fusing Pressure/Release Motor Unit Apply silent grease to the fusing pressure/release motor unit at the locations shown below. Location Part name Note Fusing pressure/release BRACKET:DRIVE:PRESSURE 5 mm from the tip. motor peen RELEASE:PEEN Lubricated bearing of fusing...
  • Page 217 Special Tools and Lubricants Location Part name Note Tip of fusing pressure/release SHAFT:DRIVE:PRESSURE motor peen RELEASE:PRESS FIT Coating Amt. Maximum Minimum 4-13 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 218 Special Tools and Lubricants Coating Amt. Maximum Minimum D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-14...
  • Page 219 Special Tools and Lubricants Pressure Release Support Shaft Apply silent grease to the pressure release support shaft at the locations shown below. Location Part name Note Support shaft SUPPORT SHAFT:DRIVE:PRESSURE 3 places. Apply 5 mm RELEASE:PLANETARY to shaft tip. [J] Support shaft 3 places.

  • Page 220: Paper Feed Drive (Optional Bank)

    Special Tools and Lubricants Paper Feed Drive (Optional Bank) Bank Drive Motor Apply silent grease to the gear unit at the location shown below. Location Pate name Note [A] Bank drive Apply an 8mm wide band of grease, 5 to 13 mm motor shaft MOTOR:GEAR:10W from the tip of the roller as shown.

  • Page 221: Locations To Apply Quick Drying Grease

    Special Tools and Lubricants 4.3.2 LOCATIONS TO APPLY QUICK DRYING GREASE Drum Drive Apply quick-drying grease to the locations shown below. Location Part name Note Tip of drum joint JOINT:DRIVE:DRUM 3 places. Apply around the cogs, and surface of cogs the shaft tip.

  • Page 222: Paper Feed Drive (Optional Bank)

    Special Tools and Lubricants Location Parts name Note [A] Holder HOLDER:DRIVE:TONER 6 places. Apply to the groove grooves SUPPLY surfaces. [B] Link tab LINK:DRIVE:TONER SUPPLY 3 places. Apply to the tab surfaces. Paper Feed Drive (Optional Bank) Apply quick-drying grease to the locations shown below. Location Parts name Note...

  • Page 223: Locations To Apply Grease In The Fusing Unit

    Special Tools and Lubricants 4.3.3 LOCATIONS TO APPLY GREASE IN THE FUSING UNIT Inside Fusing Unit Apply Barrierta grease at the locations shown below Location Part name Note Between fusing unit CAM:ON-OFF, 2 places. separation cam and COVER:LEVER:PRESSURE pressure lever Hot roller bushing insertion GEAR:HOT ROLLER 2 places (both sides...
  • Page 224 Special Tools and Lubricants Coating Amt. Maximum Minimum D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-20...

  • Page 225: Locations To Apply Grease In The Scanner Unit

    Special Tools and Lubricants 4.3.4 LOCATIONS TO APPLY GREASE IN THE SCANNER UNIT Inside Scanner Unit Apply grease (FLOIL G-348) at the locations shown below. Location Part name Note [A] Scanner GUIDE ROD: 5 places. guide rod SCANNER Hold the scanner carriage with the hand, and then move it right and left three times from the end to the end of the guide rod to spread the grease to the whole.
  • Page 226 Special Tools and Lubricants Coating Amt. Maximum Minimum D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-22...

  • Page 227: Smc Report Storage

    SMC Report Storage 4.4 SMC REPORT STORAGE The SMC Report that lists the factory settings is stored behind the platen sheet of the SPDF on MF models. An SMC Report is not provided with the printer model when it is shipped from the factory.
  • Page 228 SMC Report Storage SP No. SP name Description 1-003-023 Paper Buckle Tray1: Envelope 1-003-031 Paper Buckle Tray2: Plain 1-003-032 Paper Buckle Tray2: Thick 1-003-041 Paper Buckle Tray3: Plain 1-003-042 Paper Buckle Tray3: Thick 1-003-051 Paper Buckle Tray4: Plain 1-003-052 Paper Buckle Tray4: Thick 1-003-061 Paper Buckle Duplex: Plain 1-003-062...
  • Page 229 SMC Report Storage SP No. SP name Description 4-611-002 Gray Balance Set: B DF Scan MF models only 4-712-001 CIS GB Adj. Value: R MF models only 4-713-001 CIS GB Adj. Value: G MF models only 4-714-001 CIS GB Adj. Value: B MF models only 5-745-211 DeemedPowerConsumption Controller Standby...

  • Page 230: Exterior Covers (Printer Model)

    Exterior Covers (Printer Model) 4.5 EXTERIOR COVERS (PRINTER MODEL) 4.5.1 RIGHT COVER (PRINTER) Remove the paper cassette. Open the front cover [A] by pressing the front cover button. Open the rear cover [A]. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-26...
  • Page 231 Exterior Covers (Printer Model) Remove the right cover [A]. The right cover is held in position by bosses on the frame of the main machine, so the right cover must be disconnected from these bosses before removal. 4-27 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 232: Left Cover (Printer)

    Exterior Covers (Printer Model) 4.5.2 LEFT COVER (PRINTER) 1. Remove the paper cassette. 2. Open the front cover [A] by pressing the front cover button. 3. Open the rear cover [A]. 4. Remove the left cover [A]. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-28...

  • Page 233: Front Cover (Printer)

    Exterior Covers (Printer Model) The left cover is held in position by bosses on the frame of the main machine, so disconnect these bosses before you remove the left cover. 4.5.3 FRONT COVER (PRINTER) Remove the right cover. (Right Cover (Printer)) Close the front cover, and open the bypass tray [A].
  • Page 234 Exterior Covers (Printer Model) Open the front cover [A] by pressing the front cover button. Disconnect the harness from the front cover [A] and remove the fastened part [B] of the belt. Release both hinges to remove the front cover [A]. Release the right hinge first. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-30...

  • Page 235: Operation Panel (Printer)

    Exterior Covers (Printer Model) 4.5.4 OPERATION PANEL (PRINTER) 1. Remove the right cover. (Right Cover (Printer)) 2. Lift up the display [A], and then remove the screw. 3. Release the two hooks to remove the operation panel [A], and then disconnect the harness from the operation panel.

  • Page 236: Upper Cover (Printer)

    Exterior Covers (Printer Model) 4.5.5 UPPER COVER (PRINTER) Remove the right cover. (Right Cover (Printer)) Remove the left cover. (Left Cover (Printer)) Remove the operation panel. (Operation Panel (Printer)) Remove the upper cover [A]. 4.5.6 REAR LOWER COVER (PRINTER) Remove the right cover. (Right Cover (Printer)) Remove the left cover.

  • Page 237: Rear Cover (Printer)

    Exterior Covers (Printer Model) 4.5.7 REAR COVER (PRINTER) Remove the rear lower cover. (Rear Lower Cover (Printer)) Remove the controller board. (Controller Board (Printer Model)) Release the harness from rear cover [A]. 4-33 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 238 Exterior Covers (Printer Model) Remove the fixed part [B] for the belt of rear cover [A], and then remove the screw [C] fastening the hinge. Release both sides of the hinge to remove the rear cover [A]. Release the right hinge first. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-34...

  • Page 239: Exterior Covers (Mf Model)

    Exterior Covers (MF Model) 4.6 EXTERIOR COVERS (MF MODEL) 4.6.1 RIGHT COVER (MF) Remove the paper cassette. Open the front cover [A] by pressing the front cover button. Open the rear cover [A]. Remove the HDD cover [A] and the connector cover [B] and [C]. Use a flathead screwdriver to remove the connector cover [B].
  • Page 240 Exterior Covers (MF Model) Remove the right cover [A]. The right cover is held in position by bosses on the frame of the main machine, so disconnect these bosses before you remove the right cover. The rear upper boss is not visible from outside so confirm its location in the photo below.
  • Page 241 Exterior Covers (MF Model) If the optional offline stapler is installed, do the following, instead of removing the connector cover in step 4. Do not remove the stapler unit cradle attached to the right cover with double-sided tape. Pull out the stapler unit [A] from the stapler unit cradle. Loosen the screw.

  • Page 242: Left Cover (Mf)

    Exterior Covers (MF Model) 4.6.2 LEFT COVER (MF) Remove the paper cassette. Open the front cover [A] by pressing the front cover button. Open the rear cover [A]. Remove the left cover [A]. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-38...

  • Page 243: Front Cover (Mf)

    Exterior Covers (MF Model) The left cover is held in position by bosses on the frame of the main machine, so the left cover must be disconnected from these bosses before removal. The rear upper boss is not visible from outside so confirm its location in the photo below. 4.6.3 FRONT COVER (MF) Remove the right cover.
  • Page 244 Exterior Covers (MF Model) Open the front cover [A] by pressing the front cover button. Disconnect the harness from the front cover [A] and remove the fastened part [B] of the belt. Release both hinges to remove the front cover [A]. Release the right hinge first. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-40...

  • Page 245: Upper Cover (Mf)

    Exterior Covers (MF Model) 4.6.4 UPPER COVER (MF) Remove the right cover. (Right Cover (MF)) Remove the left cover. (Left Cover (MF)) Remove the operation panel. (Operation Panel Unit) Remove the scanner unit. (Scanner Unit (with SPDF)) Remove the upper cover [A]. Remove only screw [B] from the side, and then remove the other screws from the top.

  • Page 246: Rear Lower Cover (Mf)

    Exterior Covers (MF Model) 4.6.5 REAR LOWER COVER (MF) Remove the right cover. (Right Cover (MF)) Remove the left cover. (Left Cover (MF)) Remove the rear lower cover [A]. Open the rear cover slightly and remove the rear lower cover. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-42...

  • Page 247: Rear Cover (Mf)

    Exterior Covers (MF Model) 4.6.6 REAR COVER (MF) Remove the rear lower cover. (Rear Lower Cover (MF)) Remove the SCB with bracket. (SCB with the Controller Box (MF Model)) Release the harness from rear cover [A]. Remove the fastened part [B] for the belt of rear cover [A], and then remove the screw [C] holding the hinge.
  • Page 248 Exterior Covers (MF Model) Release both hinges to remove the rear cover [A]. Release the right hinge first. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-44...

  • Page 249: Smart Operation Panel (Mf Model)

    Smart Operation Panel (MF Model) 4.7 SMART OPERATION PANEL (MF MODEL) 4.7.1 OPERATION PANEL UNIT Application settings and additional applications installed on the Smart Operation panel can be backed up automatically and can be restored. For details, refer to Automatic Backup/Restore for Application and Settings of SOP.
  • Page 250 Smart Operation Panel (MF Model) Set the operation panel vertically and remove the screws of the sub arm [A]. Open the SPDF [A], and then hold the operation panel [B] horizontal and lift it out. Remove the screws of the main arm [A], and then remove the operation panel unit. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-46...
  • Page 251 Smart Operation Panel (MF Model) Turn over the operation panel unit, and remove the hinge covers [A] and [B]. Remove the main arm [A]. Remove the sub arm cover [A]. 4-47 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 252 Smart Operation Panel (MF Model) 10. Release the two hooks to remove the sub-arm lower cover [A]. 11. Remove the hinge covers [A] and [B]. 12. Remove the sub-arm [A]. 13. Release the clamps. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-48...
  • Page 253 Smart Operation Panel (MF Model) When clamping the USB cable [A], route the cable so it does not ride up on the operation panel PCB. Working carefully at the binding position, clamp the USB cable [A] and wire [B] at the positions shown below. When you route the harnesses, place USB cable [A] so harness [B] is folded inside, bending it inward from inside the cover.

  • Page 254: Internal Parts

    Smart Operation Panel (MF Model) 15. Disconnect the harnesses. When re-connecting the harnesses, connect them straight as shown above. When re-installing the operation panel unit, route the harnesses by referring to the photo in the reverse order. 4.7.2 INTERNAL PARTS Refer to the FSM for "Smart Operation Panel 2nd Generation (New Type)".
  • Page 255 Smart Operation Panel (MF Model) There are four hooks inside the operation panel unit. Before removing it, check the photos below. 4-51 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 256: Spdf (Mf Model Only)

    SPDF (MF Model Only) 4.8 SPDF (MF MODEL ONLY) 4.8.1 SPDF UNIT Remove the scanner rear cover [A]. Remove the scanner rear upper cover [A]. When you reattach the rear upper cover of the scanner, insert the antistatic sheet from the right side.
  • Page 257 SPDF (MF Model Only) Release the five hooks in order as shown below to free the FFC. Disconnect the right FFC from the relay board [A]. Remove the harness guide [A]. Disconnect the harnesses [A] from the SPDF, and then remove the two shoulder screws. 4-53 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 258: When Installing The Spdf

    SPDF (MF Model Only) Open the SPDF, and then remove the SPDF unit [A]. When Installing the SPDF Open the SPDF. Do the following steps: • Place the platen sheet [A] on the exposure glass. • Align the platen sheet with Velcro tape [C], with the rear left corner [B] on the exposure glass as a reference.

  • Page 259: Original Feed Unit

    SPDF (MF Model Only) 4.8.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT Before replacing the original feed unit, reset the PM counter. 1. Turn the power ON and enter the SP mode. 2. Execute the following SPs to reset the PM counter. - SP7-804-008 (Reset PM Counter: ADF Pickup) - SP7-804-009 (Reset PM Counter: ADF Feed) 3.

  • Page 260: Spdf Rear Cover

    SPDF (MF Model Only) When reinstalling the SPDF friction pad, push the lock lever and friction pad down together. 4.8.4 SPDF REAR COVER Open the SPDF top cover [A] and remove the screw. Lift the original tray [B]. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-56...
  • Page 261 SPDF (MF Model Only) Open the SPDF [A], and then release the five tabs of the SPDF rear cover with a small screwdriver. Remove the SPDF rear cover [A]. 4-57 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 262: Spdf Relay Board

    SPDF (MF Model Only) 4.8.5 SPDF RELAY BOARD Remove the SPDF rear cover. (SPDF Rear Cover) Release the hook, and then remove the SPDF relay board [A]. 4.8.6 SPDF DRIVE MOTOR (M6) Remove the SPDF rear cover. (SPDF Rear Cover) Remove the SPDF drive motor (M6) [A].

  • Page 263: Spdf Feed Sensor (S17)

    SPDF (MF Model Only) 4.8.7 SPDF FEED SENSOR (S17) Remove the SPDF rear cover. (SPDF Rear Cover) Disconnect the harness [A] from the SPDF top cover [B], and then release the clamp. Remove the harness [A] from the harness guide. Remove the SPDF top cover [A].
  • Page 264 SPDF (MF Model Only) Remove the SPDF feed sensor (S17) [A]. When reattaching the SPDF top cover, make sure to place it correctly so that the two tabs fit into the holes. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-60...

  • Page 265: Spdf

    SPDF (MF Model Only) 4.8.8 SPDF FRONT COVER Open the SPDF top cover [A]. Remove the screw, and then raise the original tray [B]. Open the SPDF, and then release the three tabs of the SPDF front cover [A]. Close the SPDF slightly, and then remove the SPDF front cover [A] while releasing the two tabs with a thin screwdriver.

  • Page 266: Feed Cover Sensor (S15), Original Set Sensor (S14)

    SPDF (MF Model Only) 4.8.9 FEED COVER SENSOR (S15), ORIGINAL SET SENSOR (S14) Remove the SPDF front cover. (SPDF Front Cover) Remove the feed cover sensor (S15) [A]. Remove the original set sensor (S14) [A]. 4.8.10 SPDF REGISTRATION SENSOR (S16) Remove the SPDF front cover.
  • Page 267 SPDF (MF Model Only) Remove the SPDF registration sensor (S16) with the bracket [A]. Remove the SPDF registration sensor (S16) [A] from the bracket. 4-63 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 268: Spdf Feed Clutch (Cl8)

    SPDF (MF Model Only) 4.8.11 SPDF FEED CLUTCH (CL8) Remove the front cover. (SPDF Front Cover) Release the harnesses on the harness guide [A] then remove it. Remove the gear bracket [A]. Remove the SPDF feed clutch (CL8) [A]. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-64...

  • Page 269: Cis Unit

    SPDF (MF Model Only) 4.8.12 CIS UNIT Remove the SPDF front cover. (SPDF Front Cover) Remove the SPDF rear cover. (SPDF Rear Cover) Remove the original feed unit. (Original Feed Unit) Remove the SPDF inner cover [A]. Lift the back of the SPDF inner cover [A] while raising the original tray [B], and then slide the SPDF inner cover toward the back of the SPDF unit.
  • Page 270 SPDF (MF Model Only) Release the four hooks in the order shown below, and then remove the ferrite core [B] from the holder to disconnect the FFC [A]. Release the routed harnesses from the harness guide [A], and then remove it. Remove the gear bracket [A].
  • Page 271 SPDF (MF Model Only) Open the SPDF unit [A] while holding the gear [B] by hand, and open the scanning guide plate (rear side) [C] by pulling the release lever [D]. • Hold the gear [B]. It is not fastened, and it may drop into the machine. •...

  • Page 272: Scanner (Mf Model Only)

    Scanner (MF Model Only) 4.9 SCANNER (MF MODEL ONLY) 4.9.1 SCANNER FRONT COVER Remove the right cover. (Right Cover (Printer), Right Cover (MF)) Remove the PCDU. (PCDU) Slide off the operation panel lower cover [A] to remove it. Open the SPDF. Release the three hooks with a small flathead screwdriver, and then remove the scanner front cover [A].

  • Page 273: Scanner Unit (With Spdf)

    Scanner (MF Model Only) There are some hooks inside the scanner front cover. Before removing the cover, confirm the positions of the hooks in the photo below. 4.9.2 SCANNER UNIT (WITH SPDF) Remove the right cover. (Right Cover (MF)) Remove the left cover. (Left Cover (MF)) Remove the operation panel unit.
  • Page 274 Scanner (MF Model Only) Disconnect the harnesses and FFCs from the scanner unit. The FFC on the left side has a lock mechanism. Press the lock lever to disconnect it. Set the ferrite core [A] in the holder when you connect the harnesses. Remove the harness guide [A].
  • Page 275 Scanner (MF Model Only) Remove the ferrite core holder [A]. When you attach the ferrite core holder [A], route the FFCs through the two ferrite cores. Slide the scanner unit and SPDF to the right, and then lift it off the machine. 4-71 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 276: Platen Cover Sensor (S13)

    Scanner (MF Model Only) 4.9.3 PLATEN COVER SENSOR (S13) Remove the scanner rear cover [A]. Remove the scanner rear upper cover [A]. When you attach the rear upper cover of the scanner, insert the anti-static sheet from the right so it slides inside the cover, and confirm that the sheet does not ride up on the scanner cover.
  • Page 277 Scanner (MF Model Only) Release the five hooks in the order shown below to free the FFC. Disconnect the right FFC from the relay board [A] while pulling it out straight. (There is no locking mechanism.) Remove the harness guide [A]. 4-73 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 278: Scanner Hp Sensor (S12)

    Scanner (MF Model Only) Open the SPDF to move the feeler, and then remove the platen cover sensor (S13) [A]. 4.9.4 SCANNER HP SENSOR (S12) Remove the SPDF unit. (SPDF Unit) Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover) Remove the scanner upper cover [A]. Pull the carriage belt [A] slowly to move the scanner carriage unit [B] to the right.

  • Page 279: Scanner Motor (M5)

    Scanner (MF Model Only) While raising rail [A] slightly, remove the scanner HP sensor (S12) [B]. 4.9.5 SCANNER MOTOR (M5) Remove the SPDF unit. (SPDF Unit) Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover) Remove the scanner upper cover [A]. 4-75 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 280 Scanner (MF Model Only) Remove screws of light shield [A], and then let it float free. The shield is attached with tape [B] so do not remove it. Remove the scanner motor (M5) with the bracket [A]. Remove the scanner motor (M5) [A]. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-76...

  • Page 281: Scanner Carriage

    Scanner (MF Model Only) 4.9.6 SCANNER CARRIAGE Remove the SPDF unit. (SPDF Unit) Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover) Remove the scanner upper cover [A]. Pull the carriage belt [A] slowly to move the scanner carriage unit [B] to the right. Never push or pull on the carriage unit directly.
  • Page 282 Scanner (MF Model Only) Slide the bracket [A] and then detach the carriage belt [B] from the pulley. Disconnect the FFC [B] while lifting up the scanner carriage [A]. The FFC is attached at [C] with double-sided tape. Do not try to strip the FFC off •...

  • Page 283: Reinstalling The Scanner Carriage

    Scanner (MF Model Only) Reinstalling the Scanner Carriage Make sure that the FFC of the scanner carriage is connected and routed correctly: The FFC [A] must be connected straight, and not at an angle. Otherwise, the SCB may be • damaged.

  • Page 284: Led Optics

    LED Optics 4.10 LED OPTICS 4.10.1 LED HEAD Remove the PCDU. (PCDU) Remove the upper cover. (Upper Cover (Printer), Upper Cover (MF)) MF model: Remove the SCB with bracket. (SCB with the Controller Box (MF Model)) MF model: Remove the PCDU cooling fan (right) (FAN1) (right) with duct [A]. Remove the inner cover [A].
  • Page 285 LED Optics Disconnect the ground wire [B] and FFC [C] straight from the LED unit [A]. MF model: When re-connecting the FFC, attach it on the hook of the harness guide. The FFC must be connected straight. Printer model: When re-connecting the FFC, attach it on the hook of the harness guide and the hook of the inner cover.
  • Page 286 LED Optics Return the LED unit to its original position. To unlock, open the front cover or use a small flathead screwdriver to raise the joints (circled in red) on the left and right. Remove the spacer [A]. 10. Pull out the LED unit [A]. Slide the LED unit to left, and then pull out the LED unit's right shaft.
  • Page 287 LED Optics When reinstalling the LED unit work carefully to avoid touching the lens surfaces. When re-attaching the LED unit, make sure that the ends of the LED shaft at the top fit into the holes of the LED unitholder. Attach the left end of the LED unit first. 11.

  • Page 288: Quenching Lamp

    LED Optics 4.10.2 QUENCHING LAMP Remove the PCDU. (PCDU) Remove the upper cover. (Upper Cover (Printer), Upper Cover (MF)) MF model: Remove the SCB with bracket. (SCB with the Controller Box (MF Model)) MF model: Remove the PCDU cooling fan (right) (FAN1) with duct [A]. Remove the inner cover [A].
  • Page 289 LED Optics Release the two hooks to remove the quenching lamp with the case [A]. Release the four hooks to remove the quenching lamp from the case [A]. 4-85 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 290: Pcdu

    PCDU Rev. 03/22/2020 4.11 PCDU 4.11.1 PCDU Do not touch the ID chip with bare hands. Open the front cover by pressing the front cover button. Hold the grip to pull out the PCDU with the toner cartridge [A]. Turn the lock lever [A], and then press down until it is horizontal.
  • Page 291 PCDU Rev. 03/22/2020 Toner ID Chip Connector Removal Open the front cover and remove the toner cartridge. Remove the ID chip connector holder [A]. Separate the ID chip connector [A] from the holder [B]. PCDU ID Chip Connector Removal Open the rear cover and remove the fusing unit. Remove the cover [A].

  • Page 292: Toner Cartridge

    Toner Cartridge 4.12 TONER CARTRIDGE 4.12.1 TONER CARTRIDGE Do not touch the ID chip with bare hands. Open the front cover by pressing the front cover button. Turn the lock lever [A], and then press down until it is horizontal. Hold the grip to pull the toner cartridge [A] out.

  • Page 293: Image Transfer

    Image Transfer 4.13 IMAGE TRANSFER 4.13.1 IMAGE TRANSFER ROLLER Before Replacing the Image Transfer Roller User maintenance model: Replace with an image transfer roller provided by the Maintenance Kit. The PM counter for the fusing unit is reset automatically, and at the same time, the counter for the image transfer roller is also reset.

  • Page 294: Discharge Plate

    Image Transfer Remove the image transfer roller [A]. Attach the image transfer roller with the black ring on the left end and the white ring on the right end. Place the transfer roller on the bearing of the guide plate pulled out in Step 2, and then gently push the guide plate down.
  • Page 295 Image Transfer Set the discharge plate [A] against the right side [B], and then insert it at the bottom. Insert the discharge plate [A] into the gap between the tabs [B] and the back frame, and then slide it to the left. Make sure that the position of the arrow marked on the discharge plate matches the three marks on the main frame shown below.

  • Page 296: Image Creation Thermistor (Th5)

    Image Transfer 4.13.3 IMAGE CREATION THERMISTOR (TH5) Remove the PCDU. (PCDU) Remove the HVPS with the bracket. (HVPS with the Bracket) Remove the cover seal [A] for the image creation thermistor (TH5). Do not reuse the removed cover seal. Replace it with a new seal. Remove the image creation thermistor (TH5) [A].

  • Page 297: Fusing

    Fusing 4.14 FUSING 4.14.1 FUSING UNIT Before Replacing the Fusing Unit User maintenance model: Replace with a fusing unit provided by the Maintenance Kit. The new fusing unit detection fuse is provided with the fusing unit in the Maintenance Kit. When the machine detects the new fusing unit, the PM counter is reset automatically, and at the same time, the counter for the image transfer roller is also reset.

  • Page 298: Fusing Upper Cover

    Fusing Remove the fusing unit [A] while pinching the green levers on the handle. 4.14.2 FUSING UPPER COVER Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit) Remove the drawer connector cover [A]. Remove the fusing front cover [A]. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-94...
  • Page 299 Fusing Remove the fusing upper cover [A]. Since the four kinds of screws are used, be careful when assembling. Call out Screw Call out Screw Shoulder screw Tapping screw (M3) Bind screw with washer (M4) Hexagonal screw with washer (M3) The plate nuts, pins, and plate can be easily removed.

  • Page 300: Fusing Thermistor (Th1)

    Fusing 4.14.3 FUSING THERMISTOR (TH1) Remove the fusing upper cover. (Fusing Upper Cover) Remove the fusing thermistor (TH1) [A]. 4.14.4 FUSING THERMOSTAT (CENTER, END) (TH4, TH3) Remove the fusing upper cover (Fusing Upper Cover) Remove the plate nut [C] to remove the fusing thermostat (center) (TH4) [A] and the fusing thermostat (end) (TH3) [B].

  • Page 301: Hot Roller Stripper

    Fusing Pull out the fusing lamp [A] from the left side. 4.14.6 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER Remove the fusing upper cover. (Fusing Upper Cover) Remove the hot roller strippers with the bracket [A]. Release the hooks and springs to remove the hot roller strippers [A]. 4-97 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 302: Hot Roller

    Fusing 4.14.7 HOT ROLLER Remove the fusing upper cover. (Fusing Upper Cover) Remove the fusing thermistor (TH1). (Fusing Thermistor (TH1)) Remove the fusing lamp. (Fusing Lamp) Remove the hot roller strippers with the bracket. (Hot Roller Stripper) Turn the position detection feeler [A] lightly clockwise to release the spring tension. When the machine power supply is off, the hot roller and pressure roller are pulled apart, so the pressure spring is extended (under high tension).
  • Page 303 Fusing top plate (marked yellow). Remove the screws of the bracket [A] on both sides, and then remove the harness guide [B]. Remove the bracket [A]. Release the boss cap (1), raise bracket [A], and then release the boss cap (2). 4-99 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 304 Fusing Remove the hot roller [A]. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-100...

  • Page 305: Pressure Roller

    Fusing 4.14.8 PRESSURE ROLLER Remove the hot roller. (Hot Roller) Remove the pressure roller [A]. Never disassemble entrance guide plate [A]. Disassembling the entrance guide plate could cause the paper wrinkles. The discharge brush [A] is attached while it is in contact with the pressure roller. After reattaching the pressure roller, you need to make the discharge brush in the correct position without removing the entrance guide plate.

  • Page 306: Fusing Thermopile (Th2)

    Fusing 4.14.9 FUSING THERMOPILE (TH2) Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit) Remove the fusing thermopile (TH2) with the cover [A], and then disconnect the connector. Release the two hooks to remove the thermopile (TH2) [A] from the cover. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-102...

  • Page 307: Fusing Pressure/Release Motor (M2)

    Fusing 4.14.10 FUSING PRESSURE/RELEASE MOTOR (M2) Remove the left cover. (Left Cover (Printer), Left Cover (MF)) Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit) Remove the fusing pressure/release motor (M2) [A]. 4.14.11 FUSING NIP PRESSURE POSITION SENSOR (S7) Remove the fusing pressure/release motor (M2). (Fusing Pressure/Release Motor (M2)) Remove the Fusing nip pressure position sensor (S7) [A] with the bracket.

  • Page 308: Paper Feed

    Paper Feed 4.15 PAPER FEED 4.15.1 PAPER FEED ROLLER Before replacing the paper feed roller, reset the PM counter. 1. Turn the power ON and enter the SP mode. 2. Execute the SP7-804-005 (Reset PM Counter: Feed Tray) to reset the PM counter. 3.

  • Page 309: Bypass Feed Roller

    Paper Feed Remove the inner cover [A] while pressing the two lock buttons in the paper tray. Raise the holder of the separation roller [A] and remove it. Remove the separation roller [A] from the holder. 4.15.3 BYPASS FEED ROLLER Before replacing the bypass feed roller, reset the PM counter.
  • Page 310 Paper Feed Open the cover [A] of the bypass feed roller. Remove the bypass feed roller [A] with the shaft. Slide the shaft to the left, and then detach the right end of the roller first. Release the hook to remove the bypass feed roller [A]. When attaching the bypass feed roller, insert the left end of the roller with the spring into the hole [A] of side plate first.

  • Page 311: Paper End Sensor (S6), Paper Near-End Sensor (S4)

    Paper Feed If the shaft is not attached correctly, a paper jam will occur. If the roller surface [A] is not set correctly as shown below, hold the end of the bypass feed roller [B] and turn it manually several times in the feed direction to seat the roller automatically.
  • Page 312 Paper Feed Release the two hooks on the upper side, and then turn the inner cover [A] toward you to remove it. Release the two hooks on the upper side, and then turn the paper feed guide [A] toward you to remove it. When attaching the paper feed guide, make sure that the paper near-end sensor feeler [A] is set correctly as shown below.
  • Page 313 Paper Feed Remove the paper end sensor (S6) [A]. Remove the bracket [A], and then remove the paper near-end sensor (S4) [B]. 4-109 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 314: Bypass Feed Unit

    Paper Feed 4.15.5 BYPASS FEED UNIT Remove the right cover. (Right Cover (Printer), Right Cover (MF)) Remove the left cover. (Left Cover (Printer), Left Cover (MF)) Remove the front cover. (Front Cover (Printer), Front Cover (MF)) Remove the bypass feed roller. (Bypass Feed Roller) Remove the bypass lift clutch (CL3).

  • Page 315: Bypass Friction Pad

    Paper Feed 4.15.6 BYPASS FRICTION PAD Before replacing the bypass friction pad, reset the PM counter. 1. Turn the power ON and enter the SP mode. 2. Execute the SP7-804-058 (Reset PM Counter: Spr. Bypass) to reset the PM counter. 3.

  • Page 316: Bypass Paper End Sensor (S2)

    Paper Feed 4.15.7 BYPASS PAPER END SENSOR (S2) Remove the bypass feed unit. (Bypass Feed Unit) Remove the bracket [A] with the bypass paper end sensor (S2). Remove the bypass paper end sensor (S2) [A] from the bracket. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-112...

  • Page 317: Bypass Tray Sensor (S3)

    Paper Feed 4.15.8 BYPASS TRAY SENSOR (S3) Remove the bypass feed unit. (Bypass Feed Unit) Remove the bypass feed unit lower cover [A]. Remove the bypass tray sensor (S3) [A]. 4.15.9 PAPER SIZE SWITCH (SW4) Remove the right cover. (Right Cover (Printer), Right Cover (MF))

  • Page 318: Registration Sensor (S5)

    Paper Feed Release the two hooks to remove the paper size switch (SW4) [A] from the bracket. 4.15.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR (S5) Remove the PCDU. (PCDU) Open the cover [A] of the bypass feed roller to disconnect the connector, and then pull it towards you to remove.
  • Page 319 Paper Feed Release the five hooks to remove the harness cover [A]. Remove the registration sensor (S5) [A]. 4-115 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 320: Registration Roller

    Paper Feed 4.15.11 REGISTRATION ROLLER Remove the bypass feed unit. (Bypass Feed Unit) Remove the HVPS with the bracket. (HVPS with the Bracket) Remove the bearing [A] of the registration drive roller on the left side. Remove the registration clutch (CL5). (Registration Clutch (CL5)) Remove the bearing [A] of the registration drive roller on the right side.
  • Page 321 Paper Feed Remove the springs [B] of the holders for registration driven roller [A] on both sides, and then slide the holder (left end white, right end black) to remove the registration driven roller with the holders. Remove the registration drive roller [A]. When attaching/removing the registration drive roller, be careful not to damage it with the edge of the cover sheet.

  • Page 322: Paper Exit/ Duplex

    Paper Exit/ Duplex 4.16 PAPER EXIT/ DUPLEX 4.16.1 PAPER EXIT FULL SENSOR (S10) Remove the upper cover. (Upper Cover (Printer), Upper Cover (MF)) Remove the Paper exit full sensor (S10) [A]. 4.16.2 PAPER EXIT/REVERSE SENSOR (S1) Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover (Printer), Rear Cover...
  • Page 323 Paper Exit/ Duplex Release the two hooks, and then remove the duplex unit [A]. Remove the guide plate [A]. Remove the paper exit/reverse sensor (S1) [A]. 4-119 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 324: Duplex Entrance Sensor (S8)

    Paper Exit/ Duplex 4.16.3 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR (S8) Remove the Fusing unit. (Fusing Unit) Remove the bracket [A], and then remove the duplex entrance sensor (S8) [B]. 4.16.4 EXIT/REVERSE MOTOR (M1) Remove the upper cover. (Printer models: Upper Cover (Printer), MF models: Upper Cover (MF))

  • Page 325: Exit Junction Gate Solenoid (Sol1)

    Paper Exit/ Duplex 4.16.5 EXIT JUNCTION GATE SOLENOID (SOL1) Remove the upper cover. (Upper Cover (Printer), Upper Cover (MF)) Remove the exit junction gate solenoid (SOL1) [A]. 4-121 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 326: Drive Units

    Drive Units 4.17 DRIVE UNITS 4.17.1 TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH (CL2) Remove the right cover. (Right Cover (Printer), Right Cover (MF)) Remove the clutch cover [A]. Work carefully when assembling. The bearing [A] can catch easily on the clutch cover and become disengaged.
  • Page 327 Drive Units Remove the toner supply clutch (CL2) [A]. When you install the toner supply clutch (CL2), match the gear notches [A] (x3) with the cogs [B] (x3). Also, the gear shaft is "D" cut so match it with the "D" cut hole of the clutch. When attaching the toner supply clutch (CL2), make sure that the clutch connector is set over the holder.

  • Page 328: Bypass Feed Clutch (Cl4)

    Drive Units 4.17.2 BYPASS FEED CLUTCH (CL4) Remove the right cover. (Right Cover (Printer), Right Cover (MF)) Remove the clutch cover [A]. Work carefully when assembling. The bearing [A] can catch easily on the clutch cover and become disengaged. MF model: Carefully remove the FFC attached to the clutch cover with double-sided tape to avoid damage to the FFC.
  • Page 329 Drive Units Remove the bypass feed clutch (CL4) [A]. When you install the bypass feed clutch (CL4), match the gear notches [A] (x3) with the cogs [B] (x3). Also, the gear shaft is "D” cut so match it with the "D" cut hole of the clutch. When attaching the bypass feed clutch (CL4), make sure that the connector of the clutch is set over the holder as shown below.

  • Page 330: Bypass Lift Clutch (Cl3)

    Drive Units 4.17.3 BYPASS LIFT CLUTCH (CL3) Remove the right cover. (Right Cover (Printer), Right Cover (MF)) Remove the front cover. (Front Cover (Printer), Front Cover (MF)) remove the bypass lift clutch (CL3) [A]. When attaching the bypass lift clutch (CL3), make sure that the connector of the clutch is set over the holder as shown below.

  • Page 331: Registration Clutch (Cl5)

    Drive Units 4.17.4 REGISTRATION CLUTCH (CL5) MF model: Remove the SCB with the bracket. (SCB with the Controller Box (MF Model)) Printer model: Remove the BCU with bracket. (BCU with the Bracket (Printer Model)) Remove the registration clutch (CL5) [A]. 4.17.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH (CL6) MF model: Remove the SCB with the bracket.

  • Page 332: Duplex Clutch (Cl1)

    Drive Units 4.17.6 DUPLEX CLUTCH (CL1) MF model: Remove the SCB with the bracket. (SCB with the Controller Box (MF Model)) Printer model: Remove the controller board. (Controller Board (Printer Model)) Remove the duplex clutch (CL1) [A]. 4.17.7 RELAY CLUTCH (CL7) Remove the toner supply clutch (CL2).
  • Page 333 Drive Units Remove the gear unit [A]. When removing the gear unit, be careful not to injure the belt linked to the front cover. When you install the gear unit, confirm that the two pegs of the joint lever [A] are inserted correctly into the rings of the toner supply/collection drive link.
  • Page 334 Drive Units 10. Remove the gear [A] on the relay clutch (CL7). 11. Remove the relay clutch (CL7) [A]. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-130...

  • Page 335: Drum Motor (M3)

    Drive Units 4.17.8 DRUM MOTOR (M3) MF model: Remove the SCB with the bracket. (SCB with the Controller Box (MF Model)) Printer model: Remove the BCU with the bracket. (BCU with the Bracket (Printer Model)) Printer model: Remove the harness guide [A]. Printer model: Remove the PCDU cooling fan (right) (FAN1) [A] with the duct.
  • Page 336 Drive Units Close the front cover or push in the joint lever [A], then remove the screw at the joint lever junction [B] that came out. Remove the drum motor (M3) unit [A]. When you re-install the drum motor (M3) unit, confirm that the joint lever [A] is set correctly in the drive link ring of the drum as shown below.

  • Page 337: Feed/Fusing Motor (M4)

    Drive Units Remove the drum motor (M3) [A]. 4.17.9 FEED/FUSING MOTOR (M4) MF model: Remove the SCB with the bracket. (SCB with the Controller Box (MF Model)) Printer model: Remove the BCU with the bracket. (BCU with the Bracket (Printer Model)) Printer model: Remove the harness guide [A].
  • Page 338 Drive Units Remove the feed/fusing motor (M4) unit [A]. Remove the feed/fusing motor (M4) [A]. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-134...

  • Page 339: Electrical Components

    Electrical Components 4.18 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 4.18.1 SCB (MF MODEL) Remove the right cover. (Right Cover (MF)) Remove the controller box lower cover [A]. Disconnect the harness, and then pull out the interface cover [A] to remove it. Remove the controller box [A]. 4-135 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 340 Electrical Components Remove the SCB [A]. Remove the NVRAM [A], [B], [C], and the two guide rails [D] from the old SCB, and then install them on the new SCB. Install the NVRAM so the indentation on the NVRAM, face the indentation marks on the SCB.

  • Page 341: Nvram On The Scb

    Electrical Components Rev. 04/02/2020 NVRAM on the SCB Three NVRAM are mounted on the SCB, one engine NVRAM [A] and two controller NVRAM [B] and [C]. When you replace an NVRAM, follow the steps in the engine NVRAM and controller NVRAM replacement procedures described below.
  • Page 342 Electrical Components Rev. 04/02/2020 Refer to the following destination list. • 1: Japan 2: North America 3: Europe 4: Taiwan 5: Asia 6: China 7: Korea 11. Power cycle the machine. If the SCB serial number is not entered correctly, SC995-01 (serial number entry error) will occur.
  • Page 343 Electrical Components Save the address book data in the SD card using SP5-846-051. • The address data stored in the machine will be discarded later during this procedure. So be sure to obtain a backup of the customer’s address book data. Note that the counters for the user will be reset when doing the backup/restore of •...
  • Page 344 Electrical Components Turn the main power OFF. Disconnect the power cord. 10. Remove the SD card containing the NVRAM data from Slot 2. 11. Replace the NVRAM on the controller board and reassemble the machine. (SCB (MF Model)) 12. Connect the AC power cord, and then turn the main power ON. Do not insert anything into SD Card Slot 2.
  • Page 345 Electrical Components functions can be used. 22. Check that the fax and scanner icons are displayed, and then input the following SP settings according to the notes taken in Step 6. SP5-895-001 (Application invalidation: Printer) • SP5-895-002 (Application invalidation: Scanner) •...

  • Page 346: Scb With The Controller Box (Mf Model)

    Electrical Components 4.18.2 SCB WITH THE CONTROLLER BOX (MF MODEL) Remove the right cover. (Right Cover (MF)) Remove the SCB [A] with the controller box. 4.18.3 HDD (MF MODELS) Before HDD Replacement Insert an SD card in SD Card Slot 2 (lower slot). Enter the SP mode.
  • Page 347 Electrical Components Remove the HDD [A] with the bracket. Remove the HDD [A] from the bracket. HDD units must not be removed without the consent of owner from the machine under • no circumstances, even if you suspect that it has been damaged. •...

  • Page 348: Fcu Board (Fax Model)

    Electrical Components 4.18.4 FCU BOARD (FAX MODEL) Accessory The FCU board of the service part contains the following items included in the package. • • Jumper • Bracket • When you replace the FCU board, transfer the SRAM data from the old FCU board to the new FCU board.
  • Page 349 Electrical Components Disconnect the harness, and then pull out the interface cover [A] to remove it. Remove the FCU [A]. Attach the jumper [A] on the removed FCU board [B]. The jumper comes with the new FCU board. Change the position of the battery jumper [A] on the new FCU board [B]. If the battery jumper is not in the correct position, SC820 will occur.
  • Page 350 Electrical Components Attach the new FCU board to the interface cover. Attach the interface cover to the machine, and then connect the harness. Connect one end of the supplied FFC [A] into the CN603 connector [B] on the new FCU board.
  • Page 351 Electrical Components 10. Use a pair of radio pliers to flatten the marked tab [A] against the bracket provided with the new FCU board. 11. Attach the bracket [A] above to the controller box. 12. Attach the old FCU board [A] to the bracket temporarily. Mount the PCB and bracket so both are horizontal.
  • Page 352 Electrical Components 13. Connect the other end of the FFC [A] into the CN603 connector on the old FCU board. Make sure that the blue tape of the flat cable faces outward. The FFC connector has the lock lever [A], so tilt the lever to lock the FFC. 14.

  • Page 353: Speaker (Fax Model)

    Electrical Components 20. Enter the SP mode. 21. Print the system parameter list from SP6-101 in the Fax SP menu, and then check the list to see whether the SRAM data has been transferred correctly. 22. Set the correct date and time from the [User Tools]. User Tools >...

  • Page 354: Controller Board (Printer Model)

    Electrical Components Remove the speaker [A] from the controller box. 4.18.6 CONTROLLER BOARD (PRINTER MODEL) Remove the right cover. (Right Cover (Printer)) Remove the controller box [A]. Slide the controller board [A] with the bracket to the right. When attaching the controller board, fasten the screws in the following order. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-150...
  • Page 355 Electrical Components Release the three hooks, and then remove the controller board [A]. Remove the NVRAM [A] and the two guide rails [B] from the old controller board, and then install them on the new controller board. Install the NVRAM so that the indentation on the NVRAM face the indentation marks on the controller board.

  • Page 356: Nvram On The Controller Board

    Electrical Components NVRAM on the Controller Board Print out the SMC Report (factory settings) with SP5-990-006. Print out the SMC Report (all data) with SP5-990-001. Turn the main power OFF. Install an SD card into SD Card Slot 2 (lower slot). Turn the main power ON.
  • Page 357 Electrical Components Remove the upper cover. (Upper Cover (Printer)) Release the two hooks to remove the harness guide [A]. Remove the harness guide tab from the right side. Check the position of the harness guide tab in the photo below. Remove the BCU [A].
  • Page 358 Electrical Components When attaching the BCU, fasten the screws in the following order. Remove the NVRAM [A] from the old BCU, and then install it on the new BCU [B]. Install the NVRAM so that the indentation on the NVRAM faces the indentation mark on the controller board.

  • Page 359: Nvram On The Bcu

    Electrical Components Turn the main power ON and enter the SP mode. Enter the BCU serial number with SP5-811-004. If the BCU serial number is not entered correctly, SC995-01 (serial number entry error) will occur. 10. Power cycle the machine. NVRAM on the BCU Print out the SMC Report (factory settings) with SP5-990-006.

  • Page 360: Bcu With The Bracket (Printer Model)

    Electrical Components 15. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 (lower slot). 16. Turn the main power ON. 17. Check the factory settings sheet from Step 1 and the SMC data printout from Step 2, and set the user tool and SP settings so they are the same as before. 4.18.8 BCU WITH THE BRACKET (PRINTER MODEL) Remove the controller board.
  • Page 361 Electrical Components Disconnect the FFC from the BCU [A], and then remove the harness guide [B]. Remove the BCU [A] with the bracket. When attaching the BCU, fasten the screws in the following order. 4-157 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 362: Psu

    Electrical Components 4.18.9 PSU Do not touch the areas outlined in red in the following diagrams when replacing the PSU. Residual charge on the board may cause electric shock. 100V models: 200V models: Remove the rear lower cover. (Printer models: (Printer), MF models: Rear Lower Cover Rear Lower Cover...
  • Page 363 Electrical Components Disconnect the harnesses from the PSU [A]. Remove the PSU [A] with the bracket. The harness is connected at the back. Pull it out slowly as you remove it by pushing the bracket downward. 4-159 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 364: Toner End Sensor (S9)

    Electrical Components Remove the cover [A] from the PSU. 4.18.10 TONER END SENSOR (S9) Remove the left cover. (Left Cover (Printer), Left Cover (MF)) Remove the toner end sensor (S9) [A]. 4.18.11 HVPS Remove the left cover. (Left Cover (Printer), Left Cover (MF)) Release the hook to remove the HVPS [A].

  • Page 365: Hvps With The Bracket

    Electrical Components 4.18.12 HVPS WITH THE BRACKET Remove the left cover. (Left Cover (Printer), Left Cover (MF)) Release the harnesses on the bracket, and then remove the HVPS [A] and toner end sensor [B] with the bracket. 4.18.13 DC SWITCH (SW4) Remove the left cover.

  • Page 366: Front Interlock Switch (Sw1)

    Electrical Components 4.18.14 FRONT INTERLOCK SWITCH (SW1) Remove the left cover. (Left Cover (Printer), Left Cover (MF)) Remove the front interlock switch (SW1) [A]. 4.18.15 REAR INTERLOCK SWITCH (SW2) MF model: Remove the SCB with bracket. (SCB with the Controller Box (MF Model)) Printer model: Remove the controller board.

  • Page 367: Nfc Board

    Electrical Components 4.18.17 NFC BOARD Open the bypass tray [A]. Release the four hinges to detach the paper guide plate [B]. Open the bypass tray about 90 degrees, and then remove the bypass tray [A]. Release the left hinge [B] first (which is C-cut) by pulling forward, and then release the right hinge [C] by pulling obliquely toward the left, front.
  • Page 368 Electrical Components Release the four hooks to remove the front upper cover [B]. Remove the harness guide [A] and cover [B], and then remove the NFC board [C]. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-164...

  • Page 369: Fans/ Filters

    Fans/ Filters 4.19 FANS/ FILTERS 4.19.1 PCDU COOLING FAN (RIGHT) (FAN1) Remove the right cover. (Right Cover (Printer), Right Cover (MF)) Printer model: Remove the upper cover. (Upper Cover (Printer)) Remove the PCDU cooling fan (right) (FAN1) [A]. Printer model: MF model: Fasten the cooling fan with its decal facing inside the machine.

  • Page 370: Pcdu Cooling Fan (Left) (Fan2)

    Fans/ Filters 4.19.2 PCDU COOLING FAN (LEFT) (FAN2) Remove the left cover. (Left Cover (Printer), Left Cover (MF)) Remove the PSU cooling fan (left) (FAN2) [A]. Fasten the cooling fan with its decal facing inside the machine. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-166...

  • Page 371: Psu Cooling Fan (Fan3)

    Fans/ Filters 4.19.3 PSU COOLING FAN (FAN3) Remove the left cover. (Left Cover (Printer), Left Cover (MF)) Remove the PSU cooling fan (FAN3) [A]. Fasten the cooling fan with its decal facing the inside of the machine. 4.19.4 AIR FILTERS Remove the filter cover (right) [A].
  • Page 372 Fans/ Filters Remove the filter cover (left) [A]. Remove the air filter (left) [A]. The filter is attached with double-sided tapes [B]. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-168...

  • Page 373: System Maintenance

    SYSTEM MAINTENANCE R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY Pa g e Da t e Ad d e d/ Up da t ed / Ne w None...

  • Page 375: Service Program Mode

    Service Program Mode 5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This • LED indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the printer to process the data.

  • Page 376: Exiting Sp Mode

    Service Program Mode Press and hold the button [B] located at the right side of the operation panel and "Check Status [A]" at the same time, until the number keyboard is displayed. Enter the key code for SP mode. Exiting SP Mode Press "Exit"...

  • Page 377: For Mf Models

    Service Program Mode For MF Models • System SP: SP modes related to the engine functions Printer SP: SP modes related to the controller functions • Scanner SP: SP modes related to the scanner functions • • Fax SP: SP modes related to the fax functions Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch panel as shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode.

  • Page 378: Service Mode Lock/Unlock

    Service Program Mode Opens all SP groups and sublevels. Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display. Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen, Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number.
  • Page 379 Service Program Mode that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and then set "Service Mode Lock" to OFF after he or she logs in: User Tools >...

  • Page 380: Test Pattern Printing

    Test Pattern Printing 5.2 TEST PATTERN PRINTING After changing an SP value for registration or image adjustment, print a test pattern to check the adjustment result. Enter the SP mode. Select SP2-109-001 (Test Printing: pattern Selection). Select the number for a test pattern that you want to print. Printer model: Press [ ] [ ] key to select the test pattern, and then press [OK] key.

  • Page 381: Firmware Update By Sd Card

    Firmware Update by SD Card 5.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE BY SD CARD 5.3.1 OVERVIEW An SD card is a precision device, so when you handle an SD card, respect the • following. • When the power is turned ON, do not insert or remove a card. During installation, do not turn the power OFF.
  • Page 382 Firmware Update by SD Card inserted, a click is heard, and it is locked. To remove the SD, push it in to unlock the spring lock. Then release it so it pops • out of the slot. Disconnect the network cable if the machine is connected to a network. Turn the power on.
  • Page 383 Firmware Update by SD Card 11. The "Update Done" message appears after completing the updating. The message differs depending on the firmware that has been updated. 12. After turning the power off, remove the SD card. 13. Turn the power on again, and check whether the machine is operating normally. 14.
  • Page 384 Firmware Update by SD Card out of the slot. Turn the power on. Wait until the update screen starts (about 45 seconds). When it appears, "Please Wait" is displayed. Check whether a program installation screen is displayed. (The screen is always in English, regardless of the machine's language settings.) When the SD card contains two or more software modules, they are displayed as follows.
  • Page 385 Firmware Update by SD Card ROM/NEW Contents ROM: Display installed module number (upper row)/ version information (lower row). NEW: Display module number (upper row)/ version information (lower row) on the SD card. Press the [Update]. The software will be updated. 10.
  • Page 386 Firmware Update by SD Card 11. When the update was completed normally, the "Update done" is displayed. 12. After turning the power off, remove the SD card. 13. Turn the power on again, and check whether the machine is operating normally. 14.
  • Page 387 Firmware Update by SD Card 5.3.5 ERROR SCREENS DURING UPDATING MF Models Printer Model EXX shows an error code. For error codes, refer to the following table: Error Code List Code Contents Solutions The module data does not match. • Power cycle the machine and try updating again.
  • Page 388 Firmware Update by SD Card Code Contents Solutions • Turn the power off, switch DIPSW-1 on the controller board to ON, and then turn the power back on to force the ROM data to be rewritten. Reset the ROM-DIMM. • If you cannot resolve the problem with the •...
  • Page 389 Firmware Update by SD Card Code Contents Solutions Configuration file error Power cycle the machine and try updating • again. Restore the SD card for installation. • • Retry updating with a different SD card. The memory is insufficient to install Reduce the number of module files to be •...
  • Page 390 Firmware Update by SD Card Code Contents Solutions Failed to execute self-update. • Power cycle the machine and try updating again. • Turn the power off, switch DIPSW-1 on the controller board to ON, and then turn the power on to force the ROM data to be rewritten.
  • Page 391 Firmware Update by SD Card Code Contents Solutions done for the engine board and FCU function. Replace the operation panel unit if the update is done for the operation panel. Card version error. • >Copy the correct update data for each The wrong card version is version on the SD card.
  • Page 392 Firmware Update by SD Card Code Contents Solutions again. Replace the SD card. The data to be overwritten cannot be • Power cycle the machine and try updating accessed when controller-related again. programs are downloaded. Copy the correct update data on the SD card. •...
  • Page 393 Firmware Update by SD Card Code Contents Solutions Reception failed due to a status error Reset the reservation date/time for the • of the machine at the reserved remote update. date/time of the package firmware update from the network. Acquisition of the latest version Check that the network is connected •...
  • Page 394 Firmware Update by SD Card Code Contents Solutions Failed to verify the signature attached • Try updating again using a valid signature. to the application or firmware. The storage capacity is not enough. • Reduce the number of applications to be installed.
  • Page 395 Package Firmware Update 5.4 PACKAGE FIRMWARE UPDATE The HDD unit must be installed on the machine to enable the SFU (Smart Firmware Update) or the package firmware update via SD card. 5.4.1 OVERVIEW Previous update method was consisted of modules (System/Copy, Engine etc.). However, current application is all-inclusive (System/Copy, Engine etc.) firmware packages.
  • Page 396 Package Firmware Update 5.4.2 IMMEDIATE UPDATE Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware. • The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to @Remote with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating function.
  • Page 397 Package Firmware Update Press [YES]. The following screen will be displayed. If the error code E66, which indicates that the download of the firmware has failed, • is displayed, implement this procedure from step 1. • Update will be started automatically after the download is finished. When the machine is in the update mode, the automatic update is suspended if a •...
  • Page 398 Package Firmware Update The figures at the right bottom part of the status indicators “Number of updated • items/ All items to be updated”. 5.4.3 UPDATE AT THE NEXT VISIT (RESERVE) It is possible to set the machine to download the package firmware which is necessary for SFU in advance, and then perform the actual installation at the next service visit.
  • Page 399 Package Firmware Update Press [Firmware Update]. Press [Reserve]. Press [Reservation setting]. Enter the dates and times of the next visit and start of receiving data. ”Next time to visit this customer”: The package firmware will be automatically • downloaded by this time/date. ”When to receive? (1-7)”: The download of the package firmware will begin this •...
  • Page 400 Package Firmware Update Successful Download In the two diagrams below, the firmware is set to be downloaded by the day before the next scheduled visit. In the first diagram, the download is successful on the first try. In the second diagram, the download fails three times and is successful on the fourth try.
  • Page 401 Package Firmware Update How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with Reserve Enter the SP mode. Press [Firmware Update]. Press [Reserve]. Press [Reserve and received package information]. Check the information displayed. When the package firmware is downloaded successfully, the details of the download result are displayed as the following picture shows.
  • Page 402 Package Firmware Update This information will only be displayed if the reserved firmware has already been • downloaded. If not, all the data items are indicated with “-”. How to Install Firmware Downloaded with Reserve Enter the SP mode. Press [Firmware Update]. Press [Update].
  • Page 403 Package Firmware Update Press [Execute Update]. Check the version of the received package firmware, and then Press [YES]. The update is started. • If the version of the reserved package in the HDD is older than the latest version, • the messages shown in the following picture are displayed.
  • Page 404 Package Firmware Update The machine will automatically reboot itself. • The figures at the lower right of the display indicate “Number of updated items/ All • items to be updated”. 5.4.4 UPDATE VIA SD CARD Update with an SD card, which is the conventional method, is available if you write the package firmware to the SD card.
  • Page 405 Package Firmware Update update will not work. • Only one version of the package firmware should be copied into the folder. If you copy multiple versions of package firmware to the SD card, the machine will select only one version of the firmware randomly. Turn OFF the main power.
  • Page 406 Package Firmware Update When the update is completed, “Update done” is displayed. The figures at the lower right of the display indicate “Number of updated items/ All • items to be updated”. Turn OFF the main power. 10. Pull out the SD card from SD card slot 2. 11.
  • Page 407 Remote Firmware Update 5.5 REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE On this machine, the software can be updated by remote control using @Remote. 5.5.1 RFU PERFORMABLE CONDITION RFU is performable for a device which meets the following conditions. The customer consents to the use of RFU. The device is connected to a network via TCP/IP for @Remote.
  • Page 408 Auto Remote Firmware Update (MF Model Only) 5.6 AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE (MF MODEL ONLY) Auto remote firmware update (ARFU) requires an Internet connection. Be sure to get permission from the customer before setting up this feature. 5.6.1 OVERVIEW By Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU), the firmware is updated by checking the global server every 76 hours and downloading the latest package if there is a more recent one.
  • Page 409 Auto Remote Firmware Update (MF Model Only) Included Firmware EcoInfoWidget Engine 5.6.2 DOWNLOADING AND UPDATING PROCESS Latest Package Download The machine checks the server for the latest version of the package. If the version of the package on the global server is later than that of the package installed on the machine, or if the machine has not downloaded the firmware package yet, the machine will be downloading the latest package in the background even when it is in use.
  • Page 410 Auto Remote Firmware Update (MF Model Only) the machine will retry the update after 76 hours. If the machine is in use when the validation process runs, the process will be retried. Retry is done up to three times every hour (can be changed with SP) and if the machine is in use for all three retries, the machine will retry the update after 76 hours.
  • Page 411 Auto Remote Firmware Update (MF Model Only) Situations validated as the machine in use While shifting to/from the energy server mode When not being able to run the firmware update due to the modules that are running e.g.) Waiting for DCS transfer (refer to appendix), accessing devices such as eMMC/SD card, etc.
  • Page 412 Auto Remote Firmware Update (MF Model Only) Device and corresponding SC number Device name SC number Engine board SC845-01 Controller board SC845-02 Operation panel (normal panel) SC845-03 Operation panel (smart panel) SC845-04 FCU function SC845-05 (on the controller board and the fax board) Canceling the update It is possible to cancel the Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU) or update in recovery mode from the operation panel.
  • Page 413 Auto Remote Firmware Update (MF Model Only) For example, when the update process is canceled while updating the first module of the operation panel, the machine will reboot when all modules in the operation panel have been updated. The firmware contents included in the package can be referred to in the release note in the SERES release of the package.
  • Page 414 Auto Remote Firmware Update (MF Model Only) SP Number Selection Overview Def. SP5-886-115 0: OFF Even when the update function is disabled, downloading the 1: ON package is allowed. The downloaded package can be used with SFU. SP5-886-116 Display Displays when the latest package check will run. only SP5-886-117 1 to 24...
  • Page 415 Auto Remote Firmware Update (MF Model Only) SP Number Selection Overview Def. The record is created when the update has successfully finished. When the update is canceled, no record is created. SP7-520-051 to Display History of the results of the download and the update. only Refer below for the numbers set.
  • Page 416 Auto Remote Firmware Update (MF Model Only) Result Description • Machine offline for other reasons • Operation prohibited • Displaying SP/UP menu The firmware update is running with another • method Configuration change prohibited • Verifying the operation panel (smart panel) •...
  • Page 417 Auto Remote Firmware Update (MF Model Only) Result Description However, this does not apply to the case where the update was canceled after the process was initiated because a user selected “Cancel”. In this case, the update is “successful” if the retry is not executed between the start and completion of the next update (76 hours after the cancellation).
  • Page 418 Updating JavaVM (Printer Model) 5.7 UPDATING JAVAVM (PRINTER MODEL) 5.7.1 OVERVIEW Updating Java VM is performed with a PC using the update tool. • Prepare the following items in advance. SD memory card reader/writer • • The updating procedure is as follows. •...
  • Page 419 Updating JavaVM (Printer Model) Remove the SD card slot cover [A]. Remove the VM Card from the SD Slot 1 (Upper). 5.7.3 UPDATING JAVAVM AND INSERTING THE VM CARD Insert VM Card into the SD memory card reader/writer of your PC. Check that the SD memory card reader/writer is detected on your PC, and then write down the drive letter.
  • Page 420 Updating JavaVM (Printer Model) 5.7.4 ACTIVATING SDK APPLICATIONS Make sure that the VM card is fully inserted, and then turn the machine power ON. Log in as the machine administrator from Web Image Monitor. Set "Auto Start" whose status is "OFF" to "On". Compare the current heap size settings and the values recorded before the update.
  • Page 421 Updating JavaVM (MF Model) 5.8 UPDATING JAVAVM (MF MODEL) 5.8.1 CREATING AN SD CARD FOR UPDATING Download the update modules from Firmware Download Center. As one of the model modules, "Java VM v12 UpdateTool" is available for download. (The version differs depending on the model.) Unzip the downloaded file.
  • Page 422 Updating JavaVM (MF Model) Turn the power on. Reconfigure the Heap size in reference to step 2. • If you have not done step 2, see the manual for the ESA application to know what value to set for the heap size. 10.
  • Page 423 Updating JavaVM (MF Model) Error Message Cause Remedy (SP5-990-006/024/025), and error file." made. pasePut() - error : fileCopy Error. Put Error! [file name: XX] error,No Writing destination is Uninstall the unnecessary SDK space full. (The NAND flash applications. left on device memory on the If you cannot uninstall it, implement paseCopy() - error : The...
  • Page 424 NVRAM Data Upload/Download 5.9 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD 5.9.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card. This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced. •...
  • Page 425 NVRAM Data Upload/Download In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that holds the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded. You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card. 5.9.2 DOWNLOADING DATA FROM AN SD CARD TO NVRAM Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.
  • Page 426 NVRAM Data Upload/Download This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM: Total Count • • C/O, P/O Count D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 5-52...
  • Page 427 SP Data Import/Export 5.10 SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT 5.10.1 OVERVIEW Import/Export Conditions Import/export is possible between devices only if their model type, region of use, and the following device configurations match. Optional paper feed unit • • Whether or not equipped with a hard disk Whether or not equipped with a Fax unit •...
  • Page 428 SP Data Import/Export Item Specification Note Example: Serial number / Information related to @Remote #2. Items for managing the history of the machine Example: Time and date / Counter information / Installation date #3. Setting values for the Engine Secret Secret information is exported if you Secret information select "Secret"...
  • Page 429 SP Data Import/Export 5.10.3 IMPORTING DEVICE INFORMATION Import device information saved on an SD card. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel. Enter SP mode. Press SP5-749-101(Import/Export: Import) Select a unique setting. Press [Encryption Key], if the encryption key was created when the file was exported.
  • Page 430 SP Data Import/Export Result Code Cause Solutions 2 (INVALID A file import was attempted between Import files exported from the same REQUEST) different models or machines with model with the same device different device configurations. configurations. 4 (INVALID Failed to write the device information Check whether the destination device is OUTPUT DIR) to the destination device.
  • Page 431 SP Data Import/Export Result Code Cause Solutions medium. 22 (INVALID The encryption key is not valid. Use the correct encryption key. KEY) When exporting device information from the control panel, the data can be saved only • on an SD card. The file format for exports is CSV.
  • Page 432 Address Book Export/Import 5.11 ADDRESS BOOK EXPORT/IMPORT 5.11.1 EXPORT Backup address book information on SD card formatted with the specified software. Turn the power off. Remove the SD slot cover [A]. Insert the SD card in the service slot [A] (lower). Turn the power on.
  • Page 433 Address Book Export/Import Turn the power on. Execute SP5-846-052 (address book information restore). Turn the power off. Remove the SD card. Attach the SD slot cover to the original position. Turn the power on, and check that the address book has been restored. User code counter information is initialized.
  • Page 434 Capturing the Debug Logs 5.12 CAPTURING THE DEBUG LOGS 5.12.1 OVERVIEW With this feature, you can save debug logs that are stored in the machine (HDD or operation panel) on an SD card. It allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis.
  • Page 435 Capturing the Debug Logs Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum storage capacity) does not transfer the log. Operation panel Memory in the operation • When an error related to the operation panel occurs. panel. Debug logs are not saved in the following conditions: •...
  • Page 436 Capturing the Debug Logs a model, insert an SD card into the service slot on the back of the machine. It is recommended to use the SD card (16 GB) provided as a service part. The part number of the SD card that is registered as a service part is "B6455060". Insert the SD card into the service SD card slot (lower slot).
  • Page 437 Capturing the Debug Logs "20150201", as shown above. • Be sure to confirm the date when the problem occurred before obtaining the logs. Specify the number of days to collect the logs in SP5-858-102 (Days of Tracing). "2" is set by default, which is the minimum needed for investigating the problem. •...
  • Page 438 Capturing the Debug Logs [D] If [Fax Contacts] is displayed, it means that the fax destinations will be included in the fax information. Where the data will be copied. The approximate time it takes to transfer the debug log is as follows. Transfer time •...
  • Page 439 Capturing the Debug Logs Procedure for Retrieving the Debug Log via Web Image Monitor Access the following URL and login as an administrator: http://[IP address or hostname]/web/entry/df/websys/direct/getSysinfo.cgi Specify the date that the problem occurred and the number of days to download the logs. If the fax destinations need to be included in the fax information, set [On] as [Obtain Fax Destination(s) Information].
  • Page 440 Capturing the Debug Logs logs: After a while, the open-or-save dialog will appear. Specify where to download and save the file. Refer to "Log File List" to check the location of log files and file name. Log File List The logs are saved with the following file path + names. Controller /LogTrace/[*the model number]/watching/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss]_[aunique debug log...
  • Page 441 Capturing the Debug Logs list number]/gps/PrintSettingList/PrintSettingList_RPGL_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].t • /LogTrace/[*the model number]/gps/PrintSettingList/PrintSettingList_RTIFF_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss]. Error log /LogTrace/[*the model number]/gps/ErrorLog/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv /LogTrace/[*the model number]/faxreport/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv information FCU debug /LogTrace/*the model number]/fculog/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].gz 5-67 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 442 Automatic Backup/Restore for Application and Settings of SOP 5.13 AUTOMATIC BACKUP/RESTORE FOR APPLICATION AND SETTINGS OF SOP This tool is supported by Cheetah system version V1.01 or later. 5.13.1 OVERVIEW The application settings and add-on applications can be automatically backed up and restored after a Smart Operation Panel replacement.
  • Page 443 Automatic Backup/Restore for Application and Settings of SOP Here is an estimate of the time required to complete backup. • Data Size Backup Time Add-on application 106MB 1 min. 6 sec. Application settings 0.2MB 36 sec. To disable automatic backup The default setting is “Enabled”.
  • Page 444 Automatic Backup/Restore for Application and Settings of SOP Touch “Close” in the dialog, “The restore is completed. Please restart.” Cycle the machine off/on Restore Error Codes An error code will appear on the operation panel display if the restore operation fails. Error Content Action...
  • Page 445 TROUBLESHOOTING R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY Pa g e Da t e Ad d e d/ Up da t ed / Ne w 6 ∼ 12 04/02/2020 Added SC180-01...
  • Page 447 Self-Diagnostic Mode 6. TROUBLESHOOTING 6.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 6.1.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE AT POWER ON As soon as the main machine is powered on, the controller waits for the initial settings of the copy engine to take effect and then starts an independent self-diagnostic test program. The self-diagnostic test checks the CPU, memory, HDD, and so on.
  • Page 448 Self-Diagnostic Mode [Reboot] key • Key to perform the reboot • Turn ON spanner LED (same as when an SC is generated). Operation during SC reboot • Timing of SC reboot When @Remote is enabled, and when a NRS alarm*1 is not generated, the corresponding SC is the object of an automatic reboot.
  • Page 449 Self-Diagnostic Mode D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 450 Self-Diagnostic Mode 6.1.4 SC MANUAL REBOOT When the automatic reboot is disabled in SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting), user reboot the machine manually. See the flowchart below. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 451 Service Call 6.2 SERVICE CALL 6.2.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS The ‘SC Table’ section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter are put into four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table shows the classification of the SC codes.
  • Page 452 Service Call Rev. 04/02/2020 displayed after the reboot. When automatic reboot occurs twice continuously, an SC is displayed without • rebooting, and logging count is performed. Also, when an SMC print is output, an asterisk (*) mark is added alongside the SC number for clarity. •...
  • Page 453 Service Call Rev. 04/02/2020 SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution LED driver PCB error • Loose, broken, defective connector or defective harness • Power cycle the machine to see if the error reoccurs. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power off/on after each step.
  • Page 454 Service Call Rev. 04/02/2020 SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Replace the FFC (SPDF CIS unit to SCB). Replace the SCB. SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC112-00 D LED illumination adjustment error: rear side The white level peak reached the prescribed threshold when the scanning guide plate was scanned after a specified number of adjustments.
  • Page 455 Service Call Rev. 04/02/2020 SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC121-00 D Scanner home position error 2 The scanner HP sensor (S12) did not go ON : • During homing operation • During auto adjustment During document, book scanning •...
  • Page 456 Service Call Rev. 04/02/2020 SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Dirty or incorrect scanning guide plate • Power cycle the machine to see if the error reoccurs. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power off/on after each step.
  • Page 457 Service Call Rev. 04/02/2020 SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Clean or replace the scanning guide plate on the rear side. Reconnect the FFC connectors (SPDF CIS unit to SCB). Replace the SPDF CIS unit. Replace the SCB. Replace the FFC (SPDF CIS unit to SCB). SC No.
  • Page 458 Service Call Rev. 04/02/2020 SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Replace the harnesses for Double-Feed Sensors (PCB9 and PCB10). Replace the Double-Feed Sensors (PCB9 and PCB10). Replace the ADF Relay Board (PCB11). Please refer to the red circles of the diagram below. SC No.
  • Page 459 Service Call 6.2.3 SC200 (LED OPTICS) SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC230-00 D FGATE ON error The FGATE signal did not turn ON within the given time period after the writing process started. Connection error between Engine and Controller •...
  • Page 460 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Check if the SC reoccurs by returning from energy saver mode. Reconnect the FFC connectors (LED head - engine board). Replace the FFC. Replace the LED head. Replace the engine board. SC277-10 D LEDA communication error (other) Power supply to the LED head array is abnormal after the machine was...
  • Page 461 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SP2-931-003) Connector defective (disconnected, loose) or harness defective • • Toner end sensor (S9) defective (no light emission) • Dirty detection surface of the toner cartridge Power cycle the machine to see if the error reoccurs. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps.
  • Page 462 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Replace the drum motor (M3) harness. Replace the engine board. 6.2.5 SC400 (IMAGE PROCESSING) SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC440-01 D High voltage power: Transfer bias output error A continuous error signal was detected for 200 ms during transfer positive bias output.
  • Page 463 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Harness defective • Engine board malfunction due to signal error • HVPS defective • Power cycle the machine to see if the error reoccurs. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power off/on after each step.
  • Page 464 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution PCDU. Reconnect the CN220 connector on engine board (Printer: BCU, MF: SCB). Reconnect the CN800 connector on HVPS. Re-install the HVPS. Replace the HVPS. Replace the engine board (Printer: BCU, MF: SCB). Replace the harnesses on HVPS.
  • Page 465 Service Call 6.2.6 SC500 (PAPER FEED AND FUSING) SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC508-00 B Bypass bottom plate operation error The bypass tray sensor (S3) signal did not change (ON/OFF or OFF/ON) for more than 4 sec. after the bypass lift clutch (CL3) activated, and this malfunction was detected three consecutive times.
  • Page 466 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 12. Apply quick-drying lubricant to the sliding parts of the bottom tray. SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC520-01 Feed/fusing motor (M4) malfunction (operating). A motor malfunction was detected because the lock signal remained HIGH (motor not rotating normally) 20 consecutive times when checked at 100 ms intervals after the motor switched ON.
  • Page 467 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution PCDU cooling fan (right) (FAN1) defective • Harness connector lose, broken, defective, or harness defective • Engine board defective • Power cycle the machine to see if the error reoccurs. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps.
  • Page 468 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Replace the PSU cooling fan (FAN3) harness. Replace the engine board (Printer: BCU, MF: SCB). SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC532-00 D PSU cooling fan (left) (FAN2) error (operating) A motor malfunction was detected because the lock signal remained HIGH (motor not rotating normally) 50 consecutive times when checked at 100 ms intervals after the motor switched ON.
  • Page 469 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Harness connector lose, broken, defective • Bank cooling fan defective • Bank controller board defective • Power cycle the machine to see if the error reoccurs. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps.
  • Page 470 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC542-01 A No reload temperature (temperature gradient detection at the center of the hot roller) Measurement starts 2.4 sec. after the fusing lamps switch on, and within 2.4 sec. 5 temperature increases below 29°C were detected 5 consecutive times. (If the temperature is below 45°C, after the fusing thermopile (TH2) detects 45°C measurement starts after 2.4 sec.
  • Page 471 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC543-00 A High-temperature software error (center) 245°C detected continuously for 1 sec. at the center of the hot roller TRIAC short • Engine board defective • • Fusing thermopile (TH2) defective Release the SC code in the SP mode, and then cycle the machine off/on to recover normal operation.
  • Page 472 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC545-00 A Fusing lamp (center) remains ON After reaching reload temperature, the fusing lamp remained on for more than 5.9 sec., the maximum DUTY time allowed after reloading. Fusing thermopile (TH2) output abnormal •...
  • Page 473 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC547-01 D Zero cross-error (relay contact fusion) After zero cross interrupt was enabled, the zero cross interrupts occurred more than four times within 50 ms (±20 ms). Damaged fusion relay (contact fusion) •...
  • Page 474 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution (Printer: BCU, MF: SCB). Replace the harnesses between the PSU and the engine board. Replace the engine board. SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC548-00 D Fusing thermopile (TH2) output error (center of the hot roller): Condensation detection 3.6 sec.
  • Page 475 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution to recover normal operation. Replace the fusing lamps. Replace the fusing thermostats (TH3, TH4). If the problem is low voltage, ask the client to connect the machine directly to a rated power source and to refrain from using extension cords.
  • Page 476 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution temperature at the end of the hot roller was 250°C or higher and triggered an abnormally high-temperature detection flag. • TRIAC short Engine board defective • Fusing thermopile (TH2) defective • Fusing thermistor (TH1) defective •...
  • Page 477 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution None SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC559-00 A Fusing jam detected for 3 counts Fusing jam detected for a 3 count when paper failed to arrive at the paper exit/reverse sensor.
  • Page 478 Service Call 6.2.7 SC600 (DEVICE COMMUNICATION) SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC622-00 D 1st paper bank communication error Detected an error when connecting the communication line. 1st paper bank control board defective • Engine board defective • 1st paper bank to the main machine connection fault •...
  • Page 479 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 2nd paper bank control board defective • 3rd paper bank control board defective • 2nd paper bank to 3rd paper bank connection fault • Power cycle the machine to see if the error reoccurs. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps.
  • Page 480 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution • Controller board-engine board connection fault • Engine board or software failure • Check and reconnect the connectors between the controller board and engine board. (Printer model only) Power cycle the machine. •...
  • Page 481 Service Call Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC667-01 D Master device mode setting error When the machine starts or returns from the energy saver mode, a CPU mode setting error is detected. Engine board defective • Power cycle the machine to see if the error reoccurs. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps.
  • Page 482 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC669-24 D EEPROM communication error: Not operating error during EEPROM data read SC669-25 D EEPROM communication error: Buffer full during EEPROM data read SC669-26 D EEPROM communication error: No error code during EEPROM data read SC669-36 D EEPROM communication error: Verification error SC669-37 D...
  • Page 483 Service Call Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC670-01 D ASIC device mode setting error When the machine starts or returns from the energy saver mode, an ASIC mode setting error is detected. Engine board defective • Power cycle the machine to see if the error reoccurs. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps.
  • Page 484 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC672 Controller startup error SC672-00 D After the machine was powered on, communication between the controller and the operation panel was not established, or communication with the controller was interrupted after a normal startup. SC672-10 D After the machine was powered on, communication between the controller and the operation panel was not established.
  • Page 485 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC672-21 D Controller startup error After the machine was powered on, communication between the controller and the operation panel was not established, or communication with the controller was interrupted after a normal startup. •...
  • Page 486 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SW5 for IM 350/350F/430F/430Fb: SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC672-99 Controller startup error The operation panel software ended abnormally. Controller stalled • Board installed incorrectly • Controller board (Printer: Controller board, MF: SCB) defective •...
  • Page 487 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC673-10 D Operation panel Flair communication error (Smart Operation Panel) The Smart Operation Panel is communicating with the main machine (this is called “flair communication”), and there was no response from the main machine.
  • Page 488 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Replace the harness between the engine board and ID chip connector. Replace the engine board. SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC682-01 D Device ID is not identified (PCDU): Device ID error (Incorrect ID) SC682-06 D Device ID is not identified (PCDU): Channel error SC682-11...
  • Page 489 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power off/on after each step. Update the firmware Replace the engine board (Printer: BCU, MF: SCB). Replace the controller board (Printer: Controller board, MF: SCB). 6-43 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 490 Service Call 6.2.8 SC700 (PERIPHERALS) SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC790-00 D Maximum number of banks (paper bank) exceeded When the power is turned ON, the number of mounted paper banks is detected and the number exceeds four. The number of mounted paper tray units exceeds the specifications.
  • Page 491 Service Call 6.2.9 SC800 (CONTROLLER) SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC816 Energy save I/O subsystem error SC816-01 Subsystem error SC816-02 Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error SC816-03 Transition to STR was denied. SC816-04 Interrupt in kernel communication driver SC816-05 Preparation for transition to STR failed. SC816-07 Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error SC816-08...
  • Page 492 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution (non-response). • An error was detected during preparation for the transition to STR. Power cycle the machine to see if the error reoccurs. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power off/on after each step.
  • Page 493 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution string Error in the OS Power cycle the machine. SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC840-00 EEPROM access error • During the I/O processing, a reading error occurred. The 3rd reading failure causes this SC code.
  • Page 494 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC842-0 The number of Nand-Flash block deletions exceeded At startup, or when the machined returned from energy saver mode, the Nand-Flash was read and judged that the number of deleted blocks had exceeded the threshold, and then SCS generated this SC code.
  • Page 495 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC855-01 Wireless LAN board error (driver attachment failure) Wireless LAN board error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered) Defective wireless LAN board • Loose connection • Power cycle the machine. Replace wireless LAN board. SC No.
  • Page 496 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Format the HDD with SP5-832-001. SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC860-01 HDD file system error at power on (HDD error) Even one partition mount of HDD failed Power off during file writing to HDD •...
  • Page 497 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC863-01 HDD data read failure (An error occurred in an area that does not belong to a partition, such as a disk label area.) SC863-02 HDD data read failure (An error occurred in partition "a".) SC863-03 HDD data read failure (An error occurred in partition "b".) SC863-04...
  • Page 498 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them. SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC864-01 HDD data CRC error (An error occurred in an area that does not belong to a partition, such as a disk label area.) SC864-02 HDD data CRC error (An error occurred in partition "a".)
  • Page 499 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC865-03 HDD access error (An error occurred in partition "b".) SC865-04 HDD access error (An error occurred in partition "c".) SC865-05 HDD access error (An error occurred in partition "d".) SC865-06 HDD access error (An error occurred in partition "e".) SC865-07 HDD access error (An error occurred in partition "f".)
  • Page 500 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC865-59 HDD time-out error (An error occurred in partition "h".) SC865-60 HDD time-out error (An error occurred in partition "i".) SC865-61 HDD time-out error (An error occurred in partition "j".) SC865-62 HDD time-out error (An error occurred in partition "k".) SC865-63 HDD time-out error (An error occurred in partition "l".)
  • Page 501 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution application is being activated. An application SD card has been removed from the slot (from the mount point /mnt/sd*). Power cycle the machine. SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC868-00 D SD card access error The SD controller returned an error during operation.
  • Page 502 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC870-03 Address book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store internal address book.) SC870-04 Address book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store delivery sender.) SC870-05 Address book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store delivery destination.)
  • Page 503 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution encrypted text to plain text.) SC870-54 Address book data error (Encryption settings: Detected data inconsistency when reading the encrypted address book.) SC870-55 Address book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to delete the file when changing encryption setting.) SC870-56 Address book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to erase the file that...
  • Page 504 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Update the firmware if the more recent firmware was released. SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC874-05 Delete all error (Delete data area) : Read error SC874-06 Delete all error (Delete data area) : Write error SC874-09 Delete all error (Delete data area) : No response from HDD SC874-10...
  • Page 505 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC875-01 D Delete all error (HDD erasure) (hddchack –i error) SC875-02 D Delete all error (HDD erasure) (Data deletion failure) An error was detected before HDD/data erasure starts. (Failed to erase data/failed to logically format HDD) •...
  • Page 506 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution TPM is defective Replace the controller board (Printer: Controller board, MF: SCB). SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC878-03 TCSD error An error occurred in TPM software stack. Unable to start TPM •...
  • Page 507 Service Call 6.2.10 SC900 (OTHERS) SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC900-00 D Electronic counter error The electronic total counter value is not the specified value. This error is detected when the counter moves forward. The NVRAM connection is not correct. •...
  • Page 508 Service Call Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution • Power loss while data was writing to HDD • Software bug Procedure 1 If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 to SC865) with SC 925, do the recovery procedures for SC860 to SC865. Procedure 2 If the machine does not show one of the five HDD errors (SC860 to SC865), cycle the main power OFF/ON.
  • Page 509 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC940-01 C Registration clutch (CL5) non-drive error When the clutch is not driven, the registration value of the failure detection is "0" three times consecutively. Connector disconnected • Harness broken • •...
  • Page 510 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC940-03 C Bypass feed clutch (CL4) non-drive error When the clutch is not driven, the registration value of the failure detection is "0" three times consecutively. Connector disconnected • Harness broken •...
  • Page 511 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC940-05 C Relay clutch (CL7) non-drive error When the clutch is not driven, the registration value of the failure detection is "0" three times consecutively. Connector disconnected • Harness broken • •...
  • Page 512 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC940-07 C Toner supply clutch (CL2) non-drive error When the clutch is not driven, the registration value of the failure detection is "0" three times consecutively. Connector disconnected • Harness broken •...
  • Page 513 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC940-09 C Exit junction gate solenoid (SOL1) non-drive error When the solenoid is not driven, the registration value of the failure detection is "0" three times consecutively. Connector disconnected • • Harness broken Solenoid defective •...
  • Page 514 Service Call Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC940-50 C Optional counter interface unit error Setting of the optional counter interface is ON, and register values, of the set detection signal of the optional counter interface unit, is "1" 3 times in a row. Driver's error of the optional counter interface Power cycle the machine.
  • Page 515 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC940-53 C Bypass feed clutch (CL4) drive error When the clutch is driven, the registration value of the failure detection is "1" three times consecutively. Driver defective • Power cycle the machine to see if the error reoccurs. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps.
  • Page 516 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Reconnect the connector on the engine board (Printer: BCU, MF: SCB). Reconnect the relay clutch (CL7). Replace the relay clutch (CL7). Replace the engine board (Printer: BCU, MF: SCB). Replace the harness between the relay clutch (CL7) and engine board. SC No.
  • Page 517 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC940-59 C Exit junction gate solenoid (SOL1) drive error When the solenoid is driven, the registration value of the failure detection is "1" three times consecutively. Driver defective • Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps.
  • Page 518 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC992-00 D Undefined Error (No SC Code) An error not controlled by the system occurred (the error does not come under any other SC code). Software defective Power cycle the machine. SC No.
  • Page 519 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC995-02 D CPM setting error 2 Comparison of machine serial number (11 digits) and machine identification code. Details: Machine serial number cannot be identified because of NV-RAM replacement or malfunctioning. Machine serial number (11 digits) or machine identification code does not match.
  • Page 520 Service Call SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SC997-00 B Application function selection error The application did not function normally after pressing the application key on the operation panel. There is a bug in the software. Check if the options required by the application (RAM, DIMM, boards) are •...
  • Page 521 Jam Detection 6.3 JAM DETECTION 6.3.1 JAM DISPLAYS When a jam occurs, the jam code is displayed on the operation panel. Only MF model, the location where the jam occurred is displayed on the operation panel as shown below: Printer model, the message is displayed on the operation panel as shown below: (A1) Open Front Cover and remove the paper.
  • Page 522 Jam Detection SP7-507-003 "Plotter Jam: History Latest2" • SP7-507-004 "Plotter Jam: History Latest3" • • SP7-507-005 "Plotter Jam: History Latest4" • SP7-507-006 "Plotter Jam: History Latest5" • SP7-507-007 "Plotter Jam: History Latest6" • SP7-507-008 "Plotter Jam: History Latest7" SP7-507-009 "Plotter Jam: History Latest8" •...
  • Page 523 Jam Detection Jam Code Jam Type Position Code Tray 1: No paper feeding continuously Bypass tray: No paper feeding Bypass tray: No paper feeding continuously Duplex: No paper feeding Registration sensor (S5): Late jam Registration sensor (S5): Lag jam Paper exit/reverse sensor (S1): Late jam Paper exit/reverse sensor (S1): Lag jam Duplex entrance sensor (S8): Late jam Duplex entrance sensor (S8): Lag jam...
  • Page 524 Jam Detection Jam Code Jam Type Position Code Tray 3 paper transport sensor: Lag jam Tray 4 paper transport sensor jam Tray 4: No paper feeding Tray 4: No paper feeding continuously Tray 4 paper transport sensor: Lag jam Paper Size Codes Paper size codes are as follows.
  • Page 525 Jam Detection 6.3.3 SENSOR POSITION LAYOUT Main Machine and Optional Bank Registration sensor (S5) Paper exit/reverse sensor (S1) Duplex entrance sensor (S8) Tray 2 paper transport sensor (Optional bank 1) Tray 3 paper transport sensor (Optional bank 2) Tray 4 paper transport sensor (Optional bank 3) 6-79 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 526 Jam Detection SPDF (MF Model Only) SPDF feed sensor (S17) SPDF registration sensor (S16) Double-feed sensor (Option) D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 6-80...
  • Page 527 Image Adjustment 6.4 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT 6.4.1 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT Print Area Check that the adjustment meets the product specification. [1]: Paper feed direction • • [2]: Print area Adjustment Reference Values B: Leading edge (Sub scanning direction): 3.0 ± 1.5 mm •...
  • Page 528 Image Adjustment SP No. SP Name Range SP1-001-006 User LeadEdge Reg: Duplex: Plain ±4.0 mm 2) Input the value. Then press [#]. 3) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment. Do the side-to-side registration adjustment. 1) Check the side-to-side registration for each paper trays and adjust them with SP1-002. SP No.
  • Page 529 Image Adjustment SP No. SP Name Range Note SP2-103-001 Erase Margin Adj: Lead 0.0 to 9.9 mm Edge Width (Default: 3.0 mm) SP2-103-002 Erase Margin Adj: Trail 0.0 to 9.9 mm Edge Width (Default: 2.0 mm) SP2-103-003 Erase Margin Adj: Left 0.0 to 9.9 mm Edge Width (Default: 2.0 mm)
  • Page 530 Image Adjustment SP No. SP Name Range SP4-008-001 Sub Scan Magnification Adj. ± 1.0% Registration A: Leading edge registration • B: Side-to-side registration • Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the paper feed trays.
  • Page 531 Image Adjustment SP No. SP Name Range SP6-006-014 T-Edge Erase (1-Pass):Face ± 5.0 mm SP6-006-015 T-Edge Erase (1-Pass):Back ± 5.0 mm Magnification Place the temporary test chart on the SPDF and make a copy from one of the paper feed trays.
  • Page 532 Other Troubleshooting 6.5 OTHER TROUBLESHOOTING 6.5.1 PAPER FEED (SKEW) Use the following flowchart to determine the cause and deal with the problem. 6.5.2 PROBLEM AT REGULAR INTERVALS Image problems may appear at regular intervals that depend on the circumference of certain components.
  • Page 533 Other Troubleshooting Paper feed direction Problems at regular intervals Problems Intervals Defective parts Problems with the printed result 113.1 mm Paper feed roller (other than black or white dots) 62.83 mm Separation roller 82.47 mm Bypass feed roller 48.44 mm Relay roller (Drive) 43.98 mm Relay roller (Driven)
  • Page 534 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.3 WHEN VERTICAL LINE OF 8MM IS GENERATED The LED head contains 26 LED chips, each covering a line 8mm wide. If a line 8mm wide extending in the paper feed direction appears, an LED chip may be damaged. If so, replace the LED head.
  • Page 535 Other Troubleshooting (MF MODEL ONLY) Uneven density can be corrected by scanner feedback control when vertical stripes and bands appear in images and cause uneven density in halftone areas. [A]: Occurrence of uneven image density [B]: After correction [C]: Printing direction Correction cannot be done for the following types of images: Uneven density, stripes, or banding in any direction other than the direction of the printing •...
  • Page 536 Other Troubleshooting On the Home screen, select User Tools icon > Machine Features > Maintenance > Vertical Uneven Density Correction. Touch [Start]. Select [A4] or [8 x 11] for the size of the paper with the halftone images, and then touch [Start Printing].
  • Page 537 Other Troubleshooting Turn the correction sheet over, and then set the sheet aligned with the upper left corner of the exposure glass as shown below. Touch [Start Scanning]. The correction is completed with the message disappears. If scanning fails, check the following: Check the orientation and position of the correction sheet.
  • Page 538 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.6 IMAGE AREA OR BACKSIDE BECOMES DIRTY WHEN FREQUENTLY PRINTING ON SMALL-SIZE PAPER When continuously printing on paper sizes smaller than A4-width, the toner may collect on the ribs of the paper transfer exit, causing stripes and bands to form on the front or back side of the paper passing below.
  • Page 539 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.7 RECYCLED OR THIN PAPER IS SEVERELY CURLED AFTER PRINTING If the delivered paper is curled, it cannot be stacked properly. In such a case, raise the paper stopper on the output tray and remove the paper frequently. You can control the fuser temperature to prevent the paper from curling by User Tools.
  • Page 540 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.9 UNEVEN IMAGE DENSITY Uneven density can occur in 2-by-2 or original halftone or filled areas during continuous print jobs longer than 20 pages with only 5 min. between print jobs. Cause The following conditions could make it difficult for toner to move to electrostatic image borders on the development roller and cause worm-eaten patterns to make the texture of images appear uneven.
  • Page 541 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.10 HORIZONTAL WHITE BANDS 94 MM APART Horizontal white lines appear in halftone images. This is likely to occur in a high temperature, high humidity environment. Cause Starting and stopping the rotation of the OPC can cause "footprints" at the development roller nip, making it difficult for the toner to stick and develop images correctly at 94 mm intervals (OPC pitch) and causing white bands.
  • Page 542 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.11 EXCESSIVE CURL WHEN PRINTER IN THICK PAPER 3 MODE A large paper curl (65mm -73mm) might develop while using “Thick Paper 3” (Paper over 165g/m ) mode. This could cause paper curling, the paper falling, or incorrect stacking. Cause In this machine, the position of the fusing unit entrance guide is arranged closer to the fusing roller as a countermeasure to prevent excessive curl in normal paper during duplex printing,...
  • Page 543 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.12 DEFECTIVE IMAGES WHEN PRINTING ON ENVELOPES Defective images like the one shown below can occur when printing on envelopes. • [A] Image distortion due to uneven texture at paper edges (sides, trailing edge) • [B] Poor fusing when printing more than three envelopes consecutively [C] Poor transfer at envelope creases •...
  • Page 544 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.13 WRINKLES OCCUR ON PRINTED ENVELOPES Wrinkles can occur when printing on envelopes under the following conditions: After printing a large number of envelopes (printing about 100 duplex mode). • When printing thick envelopes of average weight up to 110 g/m •...
  • Page 545 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.14 WATER SPOTS FROM CONDENSATION After a log job (about 20 sheets of A4) printing on single-sided sheets, water drop patterns may appear in the following duple print job. This is likely to occur in a cool environment, especially early in the morning before the machine is sufficiently warm.
  • Page 546 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.15 STAINED LEADING EDGES WHEN MANUAL DUPLEX PRINTING POSTCARDS OR THICK PAPER Staining can occur at the leading edges during duplex printing when feeding postcards or thick paper from the Bypass Tray. Cause During feed for duplex printing from the bypass tray, the printed first side is rubbing against the bypass paper feed rollers and peeling off toner.
  • Page 547 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.16 BLACK SPECKLES IN IMAGES Black spots might appear on the images: Printed on 43 CPM model • • On 1st or 2nd sheet of the print job on the half from the leading edge • Under horizontal line images Cause The water content of the paper evaporates when the paper reaches the entrance of the fusing area, and the water vapor mixes with toner and causes black spots.
  • Page 548 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.17 PRINTED BARCODES CANNOT BE READ Cases can occur when barcodes printed at 600 dpi resolution cannot be read. Cause Amount of applied toner is insufficient, or black lines have been lost due to uneven printing. • If too much toner has been applied, blank areas in the patterns are too small. •...
  • Page 549 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.19 STACK ERROR (SPILLING OF THE PAPER STACKED IN THE OUTPUT TRAY) Depending on the number of sheets delivered, the stacked paper may spill. If the number of stacked sheets is substantial, you can prevent the stack from spilling by adjusting the stopper [A].
  • Page 550 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.20 TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL POWER CORD DISCONNECTION To prevent the accidental disconnection of the power cord, you can install the AC cord clamp for this machine. Part name Part number Q'ty Remarks AC CODE CLAMP: RACCD86-236AS 11050754 Installation Procedure Attach the clamp [A] to the main machine.
  • Page 551 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.21 PAPER FEED TRAY SIDE FENCE AND END FENCE FASTENERS The side fence and end fence of the paper feed trays can be fasten for operators using standard paper sizes. Use the service parts listed below to fasten the fences. Application Part Name Part No.
  • Page 552 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.22 FLUORESCENT LAMP, X-RAY LIGHT, OR LED FLICKER Fluorescent lamps, LEDs, X-ray lights flicker after the machine is installed at the work site. Cause When the machine is turned on there is a large power surge momentarily to turn on the fusing lamps that maintain fusing temperature, causing a drop in voltage at some customer work sites.
  • Page 553 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.23 SUPPRESSING MAXIMUM POWER CONSUMPTION Power supply breakers trip when multiple machines at the same work site are turned on This section has been removed. together. The power supply capacity at the work site is small, but the customer does not want to increase power supply capacity.
  • Page 554 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.24 FIBROUS DEPOSITS OCCUR ON THE BACK SIDES OF PAPER AT THE LEADING EDGES Deposits resembling fibers can occur at the leading edge on the back side of paper. Cause When the fusing entrance guide plate [A] is raised to counter paper wrinkling during fusion in this machine, this can severely abrade the back side of paper at the leading edge.
  • Page 555 Other Troubleshooting Remove the deposits [A] on the inner leading edge of the fusing guide plate. Bend the tip of a cotton swab [B], or fold a sheet of paper [C]* , insert it between the edge of the guide plate and the hot roller, and then move it slowly back and forth along the length of the blade.
  • Page 556 Other Troubleshooting 2. Make a 1 cm fold at the tip of one end. Remove the deposits [A] at the leading edge of the fusing guide plate on the side where paper passes. Rub the cotton swab (or tip of the folded paper) on the guide plate in the direction of paper feed.
  • Page 557 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.25 TEARS OCCUR AT THE LEADING EDGES OF PAPER Paper may tear at the leading edges of paper if paper with residual burrs from cuttings is used. This can also cause double feeds or edges of the sheets to stick together. Cause Burrs caught on the edges of paper when stacks are cut during manufacturing can cause the trailing edges of the paper stick to the leading edges of the following sheets and lead to...
  • Page 558 Other Troubleshooting Check to see that the paper is a type not recommended for use with the machine. Request the operator to use only paper that is recommended for use with the machine. Make sure that the paper stack is not over the load limit for the paper feed tray. Set a stack of paper so it does not exceed the limit for the side fence of the paper feed tray.
  • Page 559 Other Troubleshooting 6.5.26 WHITE SPOTS OCCUR AT LOW TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY If ambient temperature and humidity are low, papers that are thicker than medium thickness can cause groups of white spots [A]. Cause If the paper is cold, the electrical resistance will be high which can cause a discharge during image transfer.
  • Page 560 Other Troubleshooting These measures are intended to avoid problems, and we recommend that you return to the original settings if the operation environment changes according to the season. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 6-114...
  • Page 561 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY Pa g e Da t e Ad d e d/ Up da t ed / Ne w None...
  • Page 563 Overview 7. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 7.1 OVERVIEW 7.1.1 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH PREDECESSOR MODELS Printer Model Here is a summary of the differences between this machine and its predecessors. Item P 502/501 Reason for Change 4520DN/4510DN (This machine) Specification Print speed 40 ppm...
  • Page 564 Overview Item P 502/501 Reason for Change 4520DN/4510DN (This machine) Quenching Countermeasure lamp for handling latent images and dirty edges on paper Anti-static plate Not removable Removable Improve maintenance LED head Wipe with clean Automatic cleaning Simplify cleaning cleaning cloth by linking to procedure opening/closing front...
  • Page 565 Overview Item P 502/501 Reason for Change 4520DN/4510DN (This machine) All rollers are Paper the development • • driven by one feed/fusing: unit, achieve longer main motor Paper feed service life for drum motor Development: • Drum motor Paper Feed Paper Friction pad RF (Roller Friction)
  • Page 566 Overview MF Model Here is a summary of the differences between this machine and its predecessors. Item MP 402SPF Reason for 430Fb/430F/350F/350 Change (This machine) Specification Print speed 40 ppm 43 ppm/ 35 ppm SPDF/Scanner Carriage lock Double-feed Option detection Exposure unit, Toner Single-element...
  • Page 567 Overview Item MP 402SPF Reason for 430Fb/430F/350F/350 Change (This machine) LED head Wipe with Automatic cleaning by Simplify cleaning cleaning clean cloth linking to procedure opening/closing front door Fusing Unit Fusing unit Lift after Lock release Simplify installation and release with mechanism and installation/removal removal...
  • Page 568 Overview Item MP 402SPF Reason for 430Fb/430F/350F/350 Change (This machine) automatically Paper near-end Improve detection sensor of the amount of paper remaining in the tray Paper size Paper jam The paper exits tray Makes jam removal mismatch without printing, unnecessary operation machine issues size mismatch alert...
  • Page 569 Overview 7.1.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT PCDU LED unit Toner cartridge Bypass feed tray Paper feed tray Duplex paper path Fusing unit Exit/reverse unit D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 570 Overview 7.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT Exit/reverse motor (M1) Feed/fusing motor (M4) Duplex clutch (CL1) Drum motor (M3) Registration clutch (CL5) Paper feed clutch (CL6) Bypass lift clutch (CL3) Relay clutch (CL7) Bypass feed clutch (CL4) 10. Toner supply clutch (CL2) 11. Fusing pressure/release motor (M2) D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 571 Overview 7.1.4 PAPER PATH Main machine paper feed path Bypass paper feed path Optional tray paper feed path Duplex paper feed path D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 572 Overview 7.1.5 PARTS LAYOUT (PRINTER MODEL) LED Optics, Other Description Description Quenching lamp Image creation thermistor (TH5) LED unit Toner end sensor (S9) Temperature/humidity sensor (S11) D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 7-10...
  • Page 573 Overview Paper Feed Description Description Paper size switch (SW4) Paper end sensor (S6) Bypass paper end sensor (S2) Registration sensor (S5) Bypass tray sensor (S3) Paper near-end sensor (S4) 7-11 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 574 Overview Fusing, Duplex, Paper Exit Description Description Paper exit full sensor (S10) Fusing thermostat (center) (TH4) Exit/reverse motor (M1) Fusing thermopile (TH2) Paper exit/reverse sensor (S1) Fusing nip pressure position sensor (S7) Fusing lamp x2 Fusing thermistor (end) (TH1) Duplex entrance sensor (S8) Exit junction gate solenoid (SOL1) Fusing thermostat (end) (TH3) D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 575 Overview Drive Description Description Feed/fusing motor (M4) Bypass lift clutch (CL3) Duplex clutch (CL1) Relay clutch (CL7) Drum motor (M3) Bypass feed clutch (CL4) Registration clutch (CL5) Toner supply clutch (CL2) Paper feed clutch (CL6) Fusing pressure/release motor (M2) 7-13 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 576 Overview Boards, Switches, Fans Description Description PCDU cooling fan (right) (FAN1) HVPS Rear interlock switch (SW2) DC switch (SW3) Controller board Front interlock switch (SW1) NFC board PSU cooling fan (FAN3) Operation panel PSU cooling fan (left) (FAN2) D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 7-14...
  • Page 577 Overview 7.1.6 PARTS LAYOUT (MF MODEL) SPDF Description Description SPDF relay board CIS unit SPDF drive motor (M6) SPDF feed clutch (CL8) Feed cover sensor (S15) SPDF feed sensor (S17) Original set sensor (S14) SPDF registration sensor (S16) 7-15 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 578 Overview Scanner Description Description Scanner carriage Scanner motor (M5) Platen cover sensor (S13) Scanner HP sensor (S12) D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 7-16...
  • Page 579 Overview LED Optics, Other Description Description Quenching lamp Image creation thermistor (TH5) LED unit Toner end sensor (S9) Temperature/humidity sensor (S11) 7-17 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 580 Overview Paper Feed Description Description Paper size switch (SW4) Paper end sensor (S6) Bypass paper end sensor (S2) Registration sensor (S5) Bypass tray sensor (S3) Paper near-end sensor (S4) D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 7-18...
  • Page 581 Overview Fusing, Duplex, Paper Exit Description Description Paper exit full sensor (S10) Fusing thermostat (center) (TH4) Exit/reverse motor (M1) Fusing thermopile (TH2) Paper exit/reverse sensor (S1) Fusing nip pressure position sensor (S7) Fusing lamp x2 Fusing thermistor (end) (TH1) Duplex entrance sensor (S8) Exit junction gate solenoid (SOL1) Fusing thermostat (end) (TH3) 7-19...
  • Page 582 Overview Drive Description Description Feed/fusing motor (M4) Bypass lift clutch (CL3) Duplex clutch (CL1) Relay clutch (CL7) Drum motor (M3) Bypass feed clutch (CL4) Registration clutch (CL5) Toner supply clutch (CL2) Paper feed clutch (CL6) Fusing pressure/release motor (M2) D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 7-20...
  • Page 583 Overview Boards, Switches, Fans Description Description PCDU cooling fan (right) (FAN1) Operation panel (Smart Operation Panel） Rear interlock switch (SW2) HVPS DC switch (SW3) Front interlock switch (SW1) Speaker NFC board PSU cooling fan (FAN3) PSU cooling fan (left) (FAN2) 7-21 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 584 SPDF 7.2 SPDF 7.2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT Name Name Original tray Pre-scanning roller (front side) Feed cover sensor (S15) SPDF registration sensor (S16) Original set sensor (S14) Scanning guide plate (front side) Pick-up roller Pre-scanning roller (rear side) Original set sensor actuator Scanning guide plate (rear side) Stopper CIS unit...
  • Page 585 SPDF Name Name SPDF feed clutch (CL8) SPDF relay board SPDF feed sensor (S17) SPDF drive motor (M6) SPDF registration sensor (S16) Feed cover sensor (S15) CIS unit Original set sensor (S14) 7.2.2 MECHANISM SPDF Drive The SPDF drive motor (M6) [A] drives all SPDF rollers via gears. The SPDF feed clutch (CL8) [B] controls the mechanism for picking up the original.
  • Page 586 SPDF Original Transport Path When [Start] is pressed, the SPDF feed clutch (CL8) is turned ON. Then the feed roller [A] rotates to drop the pickup roller [B] onto the top original of the stack. This moves the stopper [E] out of the way, and the original can be fed from the feed roller [A] to the SPDF entrance roller [C].
  • Page 587 SPDF The original is fed by the SPDF entrance roller [A] and the pre-scanning (front side) roller [B], scanned on the exposure glass under the scanning guide plate (front side) [C] and then delivered by the pre-scanning (rear side) roller [D]. The feeding of the original is detected by the SPDF registration sensor (S16) [E].
  • Page 588 SPDF Double Feed Detection (Option) A pair of ultrasound sensors is mounted in the ADF, one below the original feed path (emitter [A]) and the other above the path (receiver [B]). When the original passes between the sensors, an ultrasound wave from the •...
  • Page 589 SPDF This double feed detection will not function with originals that have: • Folds, wrinkles, tears • Holes Imperfectly fused images • Perforations • • Taped connections Taped surfaces • Feeding such originals could cause false detection of double-feeds. The service technician can also switch double-feed detection off/on with SP6-040-001 (Page Keeper: Mount Select, Default 0: Off).
  • Page 590 Scanner 7.3 SCANNER 7.3.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT Name Name Exposure glass (for SPDF) Platen cover sensor (S13) Exposure glass (for platen mode) Scanner carriage drive belt Scanner HP sensor (S12) Scanner motor (M5) Scanner carriage Automatic paper size detection is not available because this model has no automatic size sensor (APS) in the scanner.
  • Page 591 Scanner Name Name LED array board (LEDB) Light Path Light guiding panel Lens Reflectors CCD (soldered on the SBU) 1st mirror SBU (Sensor board unit) 3rd mirror 2nd mirror 5th mirror 4th mirror Scanner Carriage Drive The scanner motor (M5) [B] drives the drive belt [D] in order to move the scanner carriage [A] along the guide rod [C].
  • Page 592 Scanner Improved Tolerance to Black Lines When Paper Passes through SPDF This model uses a conventional mechanism in which paper comes in contact with the exposure glass during feeding. This is useful for dealing with adhesion of free dirt particles (paper scraps, etc.).
  • Page 593 Scanner Image diagram [A]: Reading position [B]: Exposure glass [C]: Dirt Dirt is detected when a document passes through, so the alert will not disappear until • the reading of the next document begins, even after exposure glass cleaning is performed.
  • Page 594 Printing Process 7.4 PRINTING PROCESS 7.4.1 OVERVIEW Description Drum Charge The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge. LED Optics An LED beam writes the print data on the drum. Toner The development roller applies toner to the latent image on the drum surface.
  • Page 595 LED Exposure 7.5 LED EXPOSURE 7.5.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT Name LED head LED spacer Drum Cleaning brush 7.5.2 MECHANISM Writing Method LED writing is superior to LD writing in unit-downsizing, noise reduction, and energy saving. Tiny LEDs, arranged in a line, are capable of creating images at 1200 dpi. Light beams emitted by the LEDs are focused using the Self-focusing Lens Array (SLA), creating an image on the OPC drum.
  • Page 596 LED Exposure LED board SLA (Self-focusing Lens Array) Drum LED Head Components The LED head is composed of the following parts. No parts are replaceable, the whole LED head must be replaced. Sheet Base LED board Frame SLA (Self-focusing Lens Array) LED Positioning D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 7-34...
  • Page 597 LED Exposure The LED head contacts the LED spacer on the drum in order to hold and adjust the correct focal distance from the PCDU (slide-and-move method). Image Position Adjustment You can adjust the printing position from each tray with [Registration] in Menu. At this time, the following controls are done as the adjustment in the machine;...
  • Page 598 LED Exposure Scanner Feedback Control (MF Model Only) Scanner feedback control corrects uneven image density (vertical streaks, bands) in the vertical direction. A halftone image is printed, the machine scans this, brightness data is written from the gray image, and then based on this data a correction value is calculated. The correction data is returned to the LED heads to correct the uneven density.
  • Page 599 LED Exposure head and the PCDU. Feedback correction cannot be done for the following types of images • Uneven density, stripes, or banding in any direction other than the direction of printing • Black stripes or black bands where there is no image Text characters broken by white spots •...
  • Page 600 PCDU, Toner Cartridge 7.6 PCDU, TONER CARTRIDGE 7.6.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT The toner cartridge is mounted on the PCDU, installed in the machine, but can be removed separately. Name Name Toner supply coil Development roller Toner supply agitator (x2) OPC drum Toner hopper Waste toner collection coil Toner mixing coil...
  • Page 601 PCDU, Toner Cartridge 7.6.2 SEPARATING THE TONER CARTRIDGE AND PCDU The toner cartridge can be detached from the machine either on its own or together with • the PCDU. • After detaching the toner cartridge together with the PCDU, you can use the release lever to separate the PCDU [B] from the toner cartridge [A].
  • Page 602 PCDU, Toner Cartridge 7.6.3 PCDU (PHOTO CONDUCTOR DEVELOPMENT UNIT) PCDU Component Layout The PCDU comprises the electrostatic charge section, OPC, the development section, and the drum cleaning mechanism. The quenching lamp, installed at the main machine side, is a new component for this machine.
  • Page 603 PCDU, Toner Cartridge Development The 1st mixing coil [A] and 2nd mixing coil [B] transport toner and the toner supply roller [C] provide the development roller [D] with toner. The electrostatic latent image on the surface of the OPC drum [E] takes on toner and turns into a visible toner image. The doctor blade [F] ensures that the toner is applied to the development roller with even thickness.
  • Page 604 PCDU, Toner Cartridge Charge, Charge Roller Cleaning, OPC Cleaning To prevent ozone from being generated, the machine has a charge roller. The charge roller [A] rotates with the OPC drum [B] to apply an electric charge evenly to the drum surface. However, if the charge roller is dirty, the applied electric charge becomes uneven. Therefore, the charge roller is always in contact with the charge cleaning roller [C], which cleans the charge roller.
  • Page 605 PCDU, Toner Cartridge More information about the PCDU unit can be confirmed with the SP codes listed below. SP No. SP name SP7-932-001 PCDU Info.: Machine ID SP7-932-002 PCDU Info.: Class ID SP7-932-003 PCDU Info.: Maintenance ID SP7-932-004 PCDU Info.: New AIO SP7-932-005 PCDU Info.: Serial No.
  • Page 606 PCDU, Toner Cartridge PCDU Near End/ End Detection The end state is determined when the count exceeds the threshold setting of SP7-940-002, SP7-941-002 set for either paper sheet count or distance count (distance is calculated from the operation time of the drum motor (M3)). The near-end threshold count setting is determined for either the paper or distance count as described below.
  • Page 607 PCDU, Toner Cartridge Operation Panel Messages Status Machine Service activity Messages Near-end MF model Service maintenance System Message User maintenance Replacement of Drum Unit will soon be necessary. Follow replacement instructions to replace the parts. Printer Service model maintenance User Rplcmnt Rqrd Soon:Drum Unit maintenance New Drum Unit is required.
  • Page 608 PCDU, Toner Cartridge 7.6.4 TONER CARTRIDGE Overview The toner cartridge contains the toner hopper, toner supply mechanisms, and the used • toner collection box. • The toner supply port on the toner cartridge has a shutter that opens when the toner cartridge is installed.
  • Page 609 PCDU, Toner Cartridge ID chip information can be checked in the SP mode. SP No. SP name Note SP7-931-xxx Information for the toner cartridge currently installed SP7-931-001 Toner Info.: Machine ID SP7-931-002 Toner Info.: Version SP7-931-003 Toner Info.: Brand ID SP7-931-004 Toner Info.: Area ID SP7-931-005...
  • Page 610 PCDU, Toner Cartridge SP No. SP name Note Date SP7-931-020 Toner Info.: Total (mg) Consump SP7-931-021 Toner Info.: PCDU (mm) Distance SP7-931-022 Toner Info.: Initial Amount SP7-931-023 Toner Info.: Near-End (mg) Consump SP7-935-xxx Information for the previously installed toner cartridge SP7-935-001 to Toner cartridge information for 1 before current cartridge -004...
  • Page 611 PCDU, Toner Cartridge Status Detect Condition What Happens (Operation panel message) Definite toner Toner end sensor detects the MF model: "[System Message] Toner Cartridge is near-end amount of toner remaining. empty. Printing will be suspended soon. Replace the cartridge." Printer model: "Check you have a print cartridge replacement(s).
  • Page 612 PCDU, Toner Cartridge Important Notice: The figures above are intended only as an example and are calculated based on the • following conditions: - A4 (LT) - 6% image coverage ratio - 3P/J - APV: 3.0k prints/month • The printing habits of the customer (document type, job size, image density, etc.) will have a substantial impact on the toner cartridge’s actual page yield.
  • Page 613 Image Transfer and Paper Separation 7.7 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION 7.7.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT Name OPC drum Transfer roller Discharge plate 7.7.2 MECHANISM Image Transfer/ Paper Separation Image Transfer After passing through the registration unit, the paper passes between the OPC drum [A] and the transfer roller [B].
  • Page 614 Image Transfer and Paper Separation Transfer current is adjusted for paper trays (paper feed unit, bypass tray, duplex tray) for paper size, paper type, the number of sheets, and for ambient conditions (operating environment). Further, the output voltage is checked when the transfer current is applied. If the output voltage exceeds the prescribed voltage, the current is adjusted (corrected), and then feedback control achieves the target voltage.
  • Page 615 Image Transfer and Paper Separation After clearing of a copy jam • • At the end of a job The PSU first supplies a negative cleaning current (about -4 A) to the transfer roller, causing negatively charged toner on the roller to move back to the drum. It then applies a positive cleaning current (+5 A) to the roller, causing any positively charged toner to migrate back to the drum.
  • Page 616 Image Fusing 7.8 IMAGE FUSING 7.8.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT Name Name Hot roller Fusing entrance guide Fusing thermistor (TH1) Pressure roller Fusing thermostat (center/end) Fusing nip pressure position sensor (S7) *At (TH3, TH4) main machine side Fusing thermopile (TH2) *At main Fusing exit roller machine side Heating lamp (center/end)
  • Page 617 Image Fusing and one at the end of the hot roller provide protection against overheating. Fusing Pressure, Paper Separation, and Paper Exit Two springs hold the pressure roller up against the hot roller to keep constant pressure on the surface of the hot roller. Paper separation pawls (strippers) strip the paper from the hot roller after fusing, and then the fusing/exit roller moves the paper out of the fusing unit.
  • Page 618 Image Fusing temperatures are adjusted automatically in low-temperature environments. Status Target temperature (Center) °C Target temperature (End) °C Standby Mode Print Mode Plain paper 1 Plain paper 2 Middle Thick Thick Paper 1 Thick Paper 2 Thick Paper 3 Thin Paper Envelopes Post Cards The fusing temperature, except for that of the Energy Saver mode, can be adjusted in the SP...
  • Page 619 Image Fusing Fusing Pressure Automatic Release Mechanism This machine is provided with a new fusing pressure/release motor (M2) which controls the opening and closing of the nip between the hot roller and pressure roller. The hot roller [A] and pressure roller [B] are pressed together by two large springs. The lift cam [C] is provided to shift the position of the pressure lever against the springs to maintain the pressure.
  • Page 620 Image Fusing The pressure is released if a paper jam occurs, making it easier to remove the jammed paper. Pressure is released when the machine is off, or in standby mode, to prevent warping the shape of the pressure roller. Machine status Pressure status Startup...
  • Page 621 Image Fusing CPM Down Control This machine employs several CPM down modes to maintain the quality of printed images and to optimize and protect the operation of the machine High-Temperature CPM Down When paper narrower than the width of the heated surface of the hot roller passes through the fusing unit, the amount of unabsorbed heat at the ends of the hot roller causes the fusing unit to become abnormally hot.
  • Page 622 Image Fusing If the fusing lamps cannot keep pace with the print job and are unable to maintain the target fusing temperature, throughput is slowed down to make it easier to maintain the target temperature. The fusing thermistor (TH1) checks the temperature every 10 sec. If the temperature reading is down by the critical temperature setting for SP1-124-001 (default: -25°C), the CPM level is lowered one step, and if the temperature reading is up by the critical temperature setting for SP1-124-002 (default: -5°C), the CPM level is raised one step.
  • Page 623 Paper Feed 7.9 PAPER FEED 7.9.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT Name Name Bypass feed roller Separation roller (Tray 1) Bypass friction pad Registration roller (Driven) Paper feed roller (Tray 1) Registration roller (Drive) 7.9.2 MECHANISM Paper Feed Operation Paper Feeding The paper feed tray of the main machine employs the RF (Roller Friction) method for paper separation.
  • Page 624 Paper Feed In front of the feed roller [A] a pre-separation plate [B] is installed to block the top of the stack from entering past the feed roller. The friction roller [C] separates the first sheet from the top of the stack so only the top sheet feeds.
  • Page 625 Paper Feed Bottom Plate Lift Mechanism When a paper tray is set in the machine, a catch on the frame of the machine snags the bottom plate lock lever [A] and releases it. When the lock is released, a spring raises the bottom plate [B] and paper stack to the feed roller.
  • Page 626 Paper Feed Tray Paper Detection Paper End/ Paper Near End Detection When the tray runs out of paper, one end of the paper end feeler [A] drops through the cut out on the bottom plate into the gap while the other end of the feeler pops up into the paper end sensor (S6) [B] and turns it off.
  • Page 627 Paper Feed SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 Paper size A4 SEF A5 SEF A6 SEF Legal SEF Letter SEF Half letter SEF Paper cassette is not set. >L: Switch is pressed Adjustable Cassette When the machine is shipped from the factory, only paper sizes up to A4 SEF can be set in the paper trays.
  • Page 628 Paper Feed Side-to-side Registration Adjustment in the Machine Paper Tray To adjust side-to-side registration, loosen the two screws on the underside of the tray and move the rack and pinion mechanism of the side guides from side to side. The holder [A] can move to the right or left (up to 2mm). When at the default (±0) position, the holder position is the triangle marked area.
  • Page 629 Paper Feed Bypass Paper Feed Operation Paper Feed and Bottom Plate Operation When the paper feed signal is issued for the bypass tray, the bypass lift clutch (CL3) [A] starts to rotate and raises the bottom plate [B]. Next, the bypass feed clutch (CL4) [C] switches on and rotates the bypass feed roller [D]. At the top of the paper stack in the bypass tray, the top sheet separates at the friction pad [E] and feeds into the machine toward the registration roller.
  • Page 630 Paper Feed Bypass Tray Paper Detection Bypass Tray Paper End Detection The bypass tray is equipped with a paper detection feeler [A] and bypass paper end sensor (S2) [B] that detect the presence of paper in the tray. The bypass paper end sensor (S2) goes on (gap open) when there is a paper in the tray, and then goes off (gap blocked by the feeler) after the last sheet feeds to signal the paper end.
  • Page 631 Paper Exit/ Duplex 7.10 PAPER EXIT/ DUPLEX 7.10.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT Name Name Paper exit full sensor (S10) Paper exit/reverse sensor (S1) Duplex reverse roller Duplex relay roller Paper exit/reverse roller Duplex entrance sensor (S8) Paper exit roller Duplex exit roller Exit junction gate Registration roller Fusing exit/reverse roller...
  • Page 632 Paper Exit/ Duplex 7.10.2 MECHANISM Paper Exit/ Duplex Operation Paper Exit During simplex printing, each sheet of paper passes below the paper path junction gate [A] and then feeds between the exit/reverse roller [B] and paper exit roller [C]. Duplex This machine performs duplex printing using a duplex switchback delivery system.
  • Page 633 Paper Exit/ Duplex Paper Exit Full Detection If the height of the paper stacked on the output tray exceeds a certain limit, the paper exit full sensor (S10) detects it based on the position of the paper overflow sensor feeler, and then the machine stops printing so the operator can remove the paper from the exit tray.
  • Page 634 Paper Exit/ Duplex D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 7-72...
  • Page 635 Air Flows (Fan Control) 7.11 AIR FLOWS (FAN CONTROL) 7.11.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT Name Name PCDU cooling fan (right) (FAN1) Image creation thermistor (TH5) PSU cooling fan (FAN3) Temperature/humidity sensor (S11) PCDU cooling fan (left) (FAN2) PSU thermistor (on PSU board) 7.11.2 MECHANISM Fans This machine is equipped with three cooling fans to provide ventilation:...
  • Page 636 Air Flows (Fan Control) Printer model MF model D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 7-74...
  • Page 637 Air Flows (Fan Control) Fan Operation Fan Operation for Each Mode This machine is designed for low-noise operation, especially at ambient and low temperature, and when the machine is in Low Duty mode, each fan motor runs at low speed or stops, and can even print when the machine is in noise suppression mode.
  • Page 638 Air Flows (Fan Control) Fan Operation in Printing Mode The PCDU cooling fans (right/left) (FAN1, FAN2) operate based on the Paper Thickness selection and the temperature readings of the development thermistor. Image Creation Thermistor PCDU cooling fans (right/left) (FAN1, FAN2) Temp.
  • Page 639 Air Flows (Fan Control) Print Duty Fan Control While the image creation thermistor (TH5) installed in the machine monitors temperature, development duty control is conducted as shown below. Status Normal STEP1 STEP2 printing Temperature (T) T<40°C 40°C≤T<41°C 41°C≤T Machine Normal Pause every 30 sec., print 14 Printing halts.
  • Page 640 Boards 7.12 BOARDS 7.12.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM Printer Model D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 7-78...
  • Page 641 Boards MF Model 7.12.2 BOARD OUTLINE BCU (Printer Model Only) The BCU board (engine board) controls the following functions: Engine sequence • Controller interface • Controller Board (Printer Model Only) The Controller board controls the following functions: SDRAM • 10Base-T/100Base-Tx/Giga Ethernet •...
  • Page 642 Boards SCB (MF Model Only) In the MF model, the functions of the engine board and the controller board of the previous machine have been brought together and mounted on a single board, the SCB (System Controller Board). Combining these two functions on one board reduces the number of controller SC errors generated by communication problems between the two separate boards of the previous model.
  • Page 643 Other Features 7.13 OTHER FEATURES 7.13.1 SILENT MECHANISM The following features help the machine run as silently as possible. Silent Mode Printer model: [Menu] > [System] > [Silent Mode] MF model: Home > [User Tools] icon > [Machine Features] > [System Settings] > [General Features] >...
  • Page 644 Other Features 7.13.2 SHINY MATERIALS SCANNING MODE In the conventional machine, when a glossy object such as a precious metal was scanned, an abnormal image (horizontal streak) was generated. In this machine, “Shiny Materials" mode selection has been added as a scanner application reading condition as a countermeasure. Select: Scan Settings >...
  • Page 645 Other Features [B]: Light amount at 16% for Shiny Materials mode • When using this mode, the following side effects occur. Degradation of image area separation performance (picture/character misjudgment, streak • emphasis processing) Graininess (feeling of the roughness of image) deteriorated •...
  • Page 646 Other Features Mode Fusing Effect on PCDU Machine Operation Drive Drive Service Life printing Envelope print mode Idles for No effect • Line speed down to about 3 30 ppm sec. Fusing: Pressure • before release printing Thick-3 mode Idles for No effect on idling •...
  • Page 647 Other Features Mode Fusing Effect on PCDU Machine Operation Drive Drive Service Life Punch hole mode Idles for The distance of drum The interval between about 3 travel between each sheets increases slightly sec. sheet increases, but before it is extremely small printing and has no effect.
  • Page 648 New Functions 7.14 NEW FUNCTIONS 7.14.1 HELP FUNCTION (MF MODEL ONLY) Overview Press [ ] on the operation panel to browse the operation manual and the operation panel related FAQ’s. The displayed manual not only be printed but also can be browsed on a smart device after scanning its QR code;...
  • Page 649 New Functions If the online Help menu cannot be opened, check the following points. Some clients may require proxy server settings at their work sites. • For proxy settings, refer to User's manual "Settings" > Screen Features > Wireless and Network >...
  • Page 650 New Functions Settings for Help Function If a customer does not want to connect the internet, the function can be disabled via UP and SP as follows: Item Value Descriptions (Default) UP Help Functions ON/OFF Press the [?] button on the Home screen to switch the (ON) display on/off.
  • Page 651 New Functions Select [Support Settings]. Enable or disable "Help Functions" and "Display Online Help Preferentially". SP Setting Log in to Screen SP mode. Select [Screen Device Settings]. >Select [Application Settings]. 7-89 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 652 New Functions Select [Settings] for “Support Settings”. Enable or disable "Help Functions", "Online Help", and "Display Online Help Preferentially". 7.14.2 HELP FOR IMAGE QUALITY & PAPER FEEDING When a user encounters troubles when operating a machine, the solution is displayed on the operation panel and a user can attempt to resolve the problem on his or her own.
  • Page 653 New Functions Printer Model The QR code for the User’s Manual printed on the machine for the printer model can be read by a smart device, and then the contents of the manual can be browsed on the smart device while using the operation panel.
  • Page 654 New Functions Trouble Actions (MF model only) • Cleaning the automatic document feeder (ADF) 7.14.3 BYPASS TRAY ASSIST FUNCTION (MF MODEL ONLY) A Bypass Tray setting has been added to make it easier to do the tray settings and avoid problems.
  • Page 655 New Functions Select the paper type, and then press [Next]. When changing the paper thickness in Plain Paper, select the paper thickness. Select the paper size and orientation, and then press [OK]. When using a custom size, select the [Custom Size] and then input the paper size. 7-93 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...
  • Page 656 Energy Save 7.15 ENERGY SAVE 7.15.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment. The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the timers are at the default settings.
  • Page 657 Energy Save Weekly Timer Schedule • • Event • Enter Sleep Mode Cancel Weekly Timer Code • Main Power Off • • Main Power On None • Default for "Event": [None] If you select any event, enter the time for the event in "Event Timer". (mainly Europe and Asia): Enter the time in [Event Timer] using the 24-hour format.
  • Page 658 Energy Save If [Exit Fusing Unit Off Mode] is set to [On Printing], the machine exits Fusing Unit Off mode when printing is performed. If [Exit Fusing Unit Off Mode] is set to [On Operating Control Panel], the machine exits Fusing Unit Off mode when a key other than the copy function key is pressed on the control panel of the machine.
  • Page 659 Energy Save 7.15.4 POWER STATES OF THIS MACHINE (MF MODEL ONLY) State Description 1 Standby/Printing State where normal operation is possible after warm-up • State during printing • 2 Printing State when printing with the backlight of the operation panel turned off state/Panel OFF 3 Fusing OFF State where the Standby Fusing OFF state is entered when the time set...
  • Page 660 Energy Save State Description OFF. • The bottom plate of the paper feed tray is raised. 4 Quiet state The Quiet state is entered when the Energy Saving key is pressed or the time set with the "Sleep Mode Timer" of the User Tools has elapsed. This is a temporary energy saving state before entering sleep mode.
  • Page 661 Energy Save Transition of operation panel to Energy Saving when [Energy Saving Recvry. for Business Applicatn.] is [On (Energy Saving)] Normally, the Energy Saving state of the operation panel LCD changes in step with the energy saving state of the MFP/LP main unit, but to support the scenario where an application that does not use the engine (printer) is executed from the operation panel, the Energy Saving state of the operation panel is transitioned through the three states ON, OFF, and Sleep with its internal timer when [Energy Saving Recvry.
  • Page 662 Option (Offline Stapler Type M34) 7.16 OPTION (OFFLINE STAPLER TYPE M34) 7.16.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT Name Name Staple unit cradle Lamp Staple unit Slide switch Stapling slot Stoppers 7.16.2 MECHANISM A paper sensor below the stapling slot detects the presence or absence of paper. 100 ms after detecting paper, the staple drive motor switches on and the staple operation •...
  • Page 663 Option (Offline Stapler Type M34) Raise the slide switch to raise the stoppers, and when the sheets are inserted along the • stoppers, the stack can be stapled at the corner with the staple diagonal to the edges of the sheets.
  • Page 664 Option (Offline Stapler Type M34) Precautions During Use During repeated use, wait more than 3 sec. between stapling. • When using the stapler never turn the main machine off or set it in the Energy Save Mode. • This will cause the machine to stop, the stack may jam in the stapler and you will not be able to remove it.
  • Page 665 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES...
  • Page 667 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 APPENDICES TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. SPECIFICATIONS ............... 1-1 1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ..................1-1 1.1.1 MAIN MACHINE ....................1-1 1.1.2 PRINTER ......................1-3 1.1.3 SCANNER ......................1-4 1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES ..................1-6 1.2.1 PAPER FEED ...................... 1-6 1.2.2 PAPER EXIT ......................1-7 1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES ..................
  • Page 668 4. SP MODE TABLES (FOR PRINTER MODEL) ......4-1 4.1 SP1-XXX (FEED) ......................4-1 4.2 SP2-XXX (DRUM) ......................4-16 4.3 SP3-XXX (PROCESS) ....................4-18 4.4 SP4-XXX (SCANNER) ....................4-19 4.5 SP5-XXX (MODE) - ENGINE..................4-20 4.6 SP5-XXX (MODE) - CONTROLLER ................4-24 4.7 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS) ..................
  • Page 669 Printer Bit Switch description .................. 6-5 6.1.4 PJL USTATUS ..................... 6-6 Printer Bit Switch description .................. 6-6 6.1.5 ADJUSTMENT ....................6-8 User Code Authentication to Restrict Color Printing ..........6-8 6.2 SCANNER FEATURES....................6-11 6.2.1 DISPLAY SETTINGS OF RECENTLY USED SCAN DESTINATION ....6-11 6.2.2 THE SETTING OF SMTP AUTHENTICATION IN SCAN TO EMAIL ....

  • Page 671: Specifications

    APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P ag e Dat e Ad d ed/ Upd at ed/ New None...

  • Page 673: General Specifications

    General Specifications 1. SPECIFICATIONS 1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.1.1 MAIN MACHINE Items Specification Type Desktop Printer model: Intel® Atom Processor AppoloLake 1.3GHz MF model: Intel® Atom Processor BayTrail-I 1.46GHz Memory 2.0 GB Printer model: 250 GB or more (Option) MF model: 250 GB or more Photoconductor type OPC Drum Copy system...
  • Page 674 General Specifications Items Specification • Optional tray: 52 – 220 g/m (14 lb. Band – 80 lb. Cover) Print paper size Tray 1 Select the paper size using the paper size dial on the tray: A4 SEF, A5 SEF, A6 SEF, 8 ×14 SEF, 8 ×11 SEF, ×8...

  • Page 675: Printer

    General Specifications Items Specification Paper feed capacity Tray1: 500 sheets (80g/m , 20 lb. Band) Bypass: 100 sheets Paper output more than 250 sheets capacity Power source 120–127V/12A, 60 Hz EU/AP/CHN/KOR 220–240V/7A, 50/60 Hz 110V/12A, 60Hz Max power IM 430Fb/430F: 1390W consumption IM 350F/350: 1380W P 502: 1350W...

  • Page 676: Scanner

    General Specifications Items Specification Devices corresponding to USB 2.0 Standard Compatible OS Standard: Windows 7/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2/2016 Option: Mac OS X 10.10 or later Resident Fonts PCL 5e: 93 fonts • PDF: 93 fonts • PostScript 3: 93 fonts •...
  • Page 677 General Specifications Items Specification Scan to Email: SMTP • Scan to Folder: SMB, FTP, NCP • • WSD scanner: Web Service on Devices for Scanning Network TWAIN scanner: TCP/IP • WIA scanner: TCP/IP • Scan to TIFF, JPEG, PDF, High Compression PDF, PDF/A Email/Folder Format D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 678: Supported Paper Sizes

    Supported Paper Sizes 1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES 1.2.1 PAPER FEED Paper Size (W x L) Standard Optional Bypass Duplex Tray Tray Tray A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm B5 SEF...

  • Page 679: Paper Exit

    Supported Paper Sizes Paper Size (W x L) Standard Optional Bypass Duplex Tray Tray Tray 35.43 14.01 Remarks: Standard Tray, Optional Tray Supported size. Need to set the dial to the paper size. Supported size. Need to set the dial to “*” and select the paper size at the operation panel. Not supported.
  • Page 680 Supported Paper Sizes Paper Size (W x L) Output Tray C6 SEF 114 x 162 mm DL Env SEF 110 x 220 mm 16K SEF 195 x 267 mm Custom Size (Width) 60.0 – 216 inch 2.37 – 8.50 Custom Size (Length) 127 –...

  • Page 681: Scanner And Lan Fax Drivers

    Software Accessories 1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer lets you select the components you want to install. 1.3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS For printing, install a printer driver on your computer. The following drivers are included on the CD-ROM: Operating System* Printer Drivers...

  • Page 682: Utility Software

    Software Accessories (TWAIN scanner runs in 32-bit compatible mode on a 64-bit operating system, so TWAIN scanner is not compatible with 64-bit applications. Use it with 32-bit applications.) Operating system for WIA driver: Windows Vista/7/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2/2016 (WIA scanner can function under both 32- and 64-bit operating systems.) Operating system for LAN FAX driver: Windows Vista/7/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2/2016...

  • Page 683: Optional Equipment

    Optional Equipment 1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 1.4.1 PAPER FEED UNIT PB1120/PB1110 Item Paper Feed Unit PB1120 Paper Feed Unit PB1110 Paper feed RF (Roller Friction) system Paper size A4 SEF, A5 SEF/LEF, A6 SEF, B5 SEF, B6 SEF, 8 ×14 SEF, 8 ×13 SEF, 8 ×11 SEF, 8 ×14 SEF, 8...
  • Page 684 Optional Equipment Item Specification Weight Approx. 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.) Power source DC 24V, 3.3V (Power is supplied from the main machine) Noise 65 dB or less D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 1-12...

  • Page 685: Preventive Maintenance Tables

    PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P ag e Dat e Ad d ed/ Upd at ed/ New None...

  • Page 687: Maintenance Tables

    Maintenance Tables 2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES 2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES Chart: A4 (LT)/6% Mode: 3 prints/job Environment: Normal temperature and humidity Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions. 2.1.1 MAIN MACHINE (P 501/ IM 430FB) Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace (R): Yield Parts The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield.

  • Page 688: Main Machine (P 502/ Im 350F/ Im 350/ Im 430F)

    Maintenance Tables Item Remarks Bypass friction pad • Wipe with a damp cloth or clean with alcohol when cleaning. • Replace when a double feed occurs. Paper transport roller Wipe with a damp cloth or clean with alcohol. Registration roller Wipe with a damp cloth or clean with alcohol.
  • Page 689 Maintenance Tables are categorized not as PM parts but as yield parts (EM parts). The parts with "(R)" in this table are yield parts. SPDF/Scanner (MF Model Only) The PM count for the following items is based on the number of originals fed: Item 30K 45K 120K EM Remarks...

  • Page 690: Paper Feed Unit Pb1120/ Pb1110

    Maintenance Tables Item 180K Remarks • Replace when a double feed occurs. Paper transport roller Clean with alcohol. Registration roller Clean with alcohol. Registration sensor Remove paper dust. Duplex relay roller Clean with alcohol. Paper exit/reverse roller Clean with alcohol. Fusing/exit reverse sensor Remove paper dust.

  • Page 691: Sp Mode Tables (Common For Both Mf Model And Printer Model)

    SP MODE TABLES (COMMON FOR BOTH MF MODEL AND PRINTER MODEL) R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P ag e Dat e Ad d ed/ Upd at ed/ New None...

  • Page 693: Remarks

    Remarks 3. SP MODE TABLES (COMMON FOR BOTH MF MODEL AND PRINTER MODEL) 3.1 REMARKS The maximum number of characters on the control panel screen is limited to 30. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the screen have been abbreviated. The following are abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full description is over 20 characters.
  • Page 694 Remarks Notation What it means An asterisk (*) to the left side of ENG/CTL column means that this mode is stored in the NVRAM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to the default value. "ENG" and "CTL"...

  • Page 695: Input And Output Check

    Input and Output Check 3.2 INPUT AND OUTPUT CHECK 3.2.1 INPUT CHECK SP No. SP Name Value Comments 5-803-002 Front Interlock Door open Door closed 5-803-003 Rear Interlock Door open Door closed 5-803-004 Registration Paper present No paper 5-803-005 Paper Size 000: A4 001: A6SEF 010: A5SEF...

  • Page 696: Output Check

    Input and Output Check SP No. SP Name Value Comments 5-803-023 Key Counter Set2 Not set 5-803-024 Key Counter Set1 Not set 5-803-025 Key Card Set Not set 5-803-026 Rear Cover Open Cover open Cover close 5-803-027 Paper Nearend Paper present No paper 5-803-083 Bank1:500/250/No...
  • Page 697 Input and Output Check SP No. SP name Operation Restriction 5-804-009 DrumMt:CCW:Hi 5-804-010 DrumMt:CCW:Mif 5-804-011 DrumMt:CW:Low 5-804-012 DrumMt:CW:ExLow 5-804-013 FeedMt:CW:ExHi Rotates feed/fusing motor Cannot switch on with forward. PCDU set. 5-804-014 FeedMt:CW:Hi 5-804-015 FeedMt:CW:Mid 5-804-016 FeedMt:CW:Low 5-804-017 FeedMt:CW:ExLow 5-804-018 FeedMt:CCW:ExHi Rotates feed/fusing motor in reverse.
  • Page 698 Input and Output Check SP No. SP name Operation Restriction 5-804-046 Duplex CL Turns duplex clutch on. 5-804-048 Toner Supply CL Turns bypass paper feed clutch 5-804-049 Registration CL Turns registration clutch on. 5-804-050 Feed Connect CL Turns relay clutch on. 5-804-051 Bypass:Tray CL Turns bypass lift clutch on.
  • Page 699 Input and Output Check SP No. SP name Operation Restriction reverse. 6-012-014 Feed Clutch Turns SPDF feed clutch on. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 700: Printer Sp Mode

    Printer SP Mode 3.3 PRINTER SP MODE 3.3.1 SP1-XXX (SERVICE MODE) 1001 [Bit Switch] 1-001-001 Bit Switch 1 Settings bit 0 bit 1 sysName value Hostname Model name (PnP name) This BitSw can switch the value of the sysName of the standard MIB. bit 2 bit 3 I/O timeout...
  • Page 701 Printer SP Mode 1001 [Bit Switch] 1-001-003 Bit Switch 3 Settings bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 Legacy HP compatibility Enabled Disabled Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000. This setting enables the starting position of the graphics in the job to be changed.
  • Page 702 Printer SP Mode bit 6 Bypass tray paper direction Changes the paper direction used with "Machine Setting(s): Any Type" in the bypass tray. This setting enables the direction of the paper in the bypass tray to specified. bit 7 1001 [Bit Switch] 1-001-005 Bit Switch 5 Settings bit 0...
  • Page 703 Printer SP Mode - BMLinkS: 05A and earlier models IRIPS PS/PDF: - 09A and earlier models: Operation under current model specification is not supported (Operation with older specification is recommended) - 15S and later models: Operation under current model specification is supported.
  • Page 704 Printer SP Mode 1001 [Bit Switch] 1-001-009 Bit Switch 9 Settings bit 0 PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs Enabled (10 Disabled submitted via USB or Parallel Port seconds) (Immediately) (IEEE 1284). To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection doesn't necessarily mean that the job can't be printed.
  • Page 705 Printer SP Mode will be garbled unless this switch is enabled (=0). bit 6 Print option configuration (rsh, rcp, ftp) Enabled Disable This BitSw enables the specification of the configuration of the print option using rcp/rsh/ftp. bit 7 Enable/Disable print from USB/SD's Disabled Enabled Preview function (Only MF model)
  • Page 706 Printer SP Mode 1001 [Bit Switch] 1-001-011 Bit Switch B Settings Limitless paper feeding for the bypass tray Disabled Enabled When the bypass tray is the target of the "Auto Tray Select", and "Machine Setting(s): Any Type" is configured for the "Tray Setting Priority" of the bypass tray, this BitSw can switch the behavior whether or not limitless paper feeding is applied to the bypass tray.
  • Page 707 Printer SP Mode Tray selection when a paper mismatch occurs. Enabled Disabled This BitSw enables the inactive auto paper select tray to be unselectable when a paper size/type mismatch occurs. 1001 [Bit Switch] 1-001-012 Bit Switch C Settings Change the user ID type displayed on the User ID Login User Name operation panel...
  • Page 708 Printer SP Mode 1-002-003 Bit Switch (2) 3 Settings bit 0 to 7 1002 [Bit Switch2] 1-002-004 Bit Switch (2) 4 Settings bit 0 to 7 1002 [Bit Switch2] 1-002-005 Bit Switch (2) 5 Settings bit 0 to 7 1002 [Bit Switch2] 1-002-006 Bit Switch (2) 6 Settings...
  • Page 709 Printer SP Mode 1003 [Clear Setting] 1-003-001 Initialize Printer System [- / - / -] [Execute] Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode. 1-003-003 Delete Program [- / - / -] [Execute] 1004 [Print Summary] Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings). 1-004-001 Print Printer Summary [- / - / -]...
  • Page 710 Printer SP Mode 1-400-002 Correct Line Width CTL* [0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step] 1-400-003 Bank Of Tray Setting CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 1-400-004 Character Density CTL* [15 to 30 / 15 / 1/step] 1-400-005 Photo Density CTL* [15 to 30 / 15 / 1/step]...

  • Page 711: Sp Mode Tables (For Printer Model)

    SP MODE TABLES (FOR PRINTER MODEL) R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P ag e Dat e Ad d ed/ Upd at ed/ New None...

  • Page 713: Sp1-Xxx (Feed)

    SP1-XXX (Feed) 4. SP MODE TABLES (FOR PRINTER MODEL) 4.1 SP1-XXX (FEED) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] 1-001-001 User LeadEdge Reg By-pass: Plain ENG* [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm] 1-001-002 User LeadEdge Reg Tray1: Plain ENG* [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]...
  • Page 714 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] IM 350F/350: 135 IM 430Fb/430F: 143 1-103-102 Fusing Idling Reload Temp.:Side ENG* [90 to 180 / * / 1deg] IM 350F/350: 105 IM 430Fb/430F: 113 1-103-103 Fusing Idling Side: Thresh ENG* [60 to 180 / * / 1deg]...
  • Page 715 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] Adjustment 1-105-012 Fusing Temperature Standby Temp: Center ENG* [140 to 185 / * / 1deg] Adjustment IM 350F/350: 155 IM 430Fb/430F: 163 1-105-013 Fusing Temperature Print Ready ENG* [140 to 180 / * / 1deg] Adjustment...
  • Page 716 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] IM 430Fb/430F: 35 1-105-042 Fusing Temperature Transparency:Roller ENG* [0 to 60 / 20 / 1deg] Adjustment Center 1-105-044 Fusing Temperature Post Card:Roller Center ENG* [0 to 60 / * / 1deg] Adjustment IM 350F/350: 38 IM 430Fb/430F: 35...
  • Page 717 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] Adjustment Side_curl 1-105-078 Fusing Temperature Special Paper 2:Roller ENG* [0 to 60 / 18 / 1deg] Adjustment Side_curl 1-105-092 Fusing Temperature Transparency:Roller ENG* [0 to 60 / 18 / 1deg] Adjustment Center_curl 1-105-094...
  • Page 718 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] Adjustment IM 350F/350: 150 IM 430Fb/430F: 158 1-105-116 Fusing Temperature Low:Plain1 ENG* [0 to 30 / 5 / 1deg] Adjustment 1-105-117 Fusing Temperature Low:Plain2 ENG* [0 to 30 / 5 / 1deg] Adjustment 1-105-118 Fusing Temperature...
  • Page 719 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] Adjustment Side 1-105-151 Fusing Temperature Roller Side:Plain1_low ENG* [120 to 230 / 160 / Adjustment speed 1deg] 1-105-152 Fusing Temperature Roller Side:Plain1_curl ENG* [0 to 255 / 141 / Adjustment 1deg] 1-105-153...
  • Page 720 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] 1-105-194 Fusing Temperature Post Card:Roller ENG* [0 to 60 / 40 / 1deg] Adjustment Side_low speed 1-105-196 Fusing Temperature Special Paper 1:Roller ENG* [0 to 60 / 20 / 1deg] Adjustment Side_low speed 1-105-198...
  • Page 721 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] 1-105-244 Fusing Temperature Post Card:Roller ENG* [0 to 60 / 40 / 1deg] Adjustment Center_low speed 1-105-246 Fusing Temperature Special Paper 1:Roller ENG* [0 to 60 / 20 / 1deg] Adjustment Center_low speed 1-105-248...
  • Page 722 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] Correction IM 350F/350: -18 IM 430Fb/430F: -10 1-123-001 Fuser ExeSheets Normal ENG* [0 to 255 / 50 / 1pages] 1-123-002 Fuser ExeSheets ConsecutivePrint ENG* [0 to 500 / 500 / 1pages] 1-124-001 CPM Down Setting...
  • Page 723 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] Time.:A5 1-124-021 CPM Down Setting High:1st CPM Down ENG* [0 to 999 / 60 / 1sec] Time.:A6 1-124-022 CPM Down Setting High:2nd CPM Down ENG* [0 to 999 / 1 / 1sec] Time.:A6 1-124-023 CPM Down Setting...
  • Page 724 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] 1-801-006 MotorSpeedAdjust FeedMot:ExtraHigh ENG* [-8 to 8 / 0 / 0.01%] 1-801-007 MotorSpeedAdjust FeedMot:High ENG* [-8 to 8 / 0 / 0.01%] 1-801-008 MotorSpeedAdjust FeedMot:Mid ENG* [-8 to 8 / 0 / 0.01%] 1-801-009 MotorSpeedAdjust FeedMot:Low...
  • Page 725 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] 1count] 1-911-010 FeedDelayDivLog DivA_T1_1_Thick ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1count] 1-911-011 FeedDelayDivLog DivA_T1_2_Nor ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1count] 1-911-012 FeedDelayDivLog DivA_T1_2_Thick ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1count] 1-911-013...
  • Page 726 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] 1-911-028 FeedDelayDivLog DivA_T2_2_Thick ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1count] 1-911-029 FeedDelayDivLog DivB_T2_1_Nor ENG* [0 to 1000000 / 0 / 1count] 1-911-030 FeedDelayDivLog DivB_T2_1_Thick ENG* [0 to 1000000 / 0 / 1count] 1-911-031 FeedDelayDivLog...
  • Page 727 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step] 1-998-003 Reserve SP reserve03 ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1] 1-998-004 Reserve SP reserve04 ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1] 1-998-005 Reserve SP reserve05 ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]...

  • Page 728: Sp2-Xxx (Drum)

    SP2-XXX (Drum) 4.2 SP2-XXX (DRUM) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max/Init./Step] or CTL 2-102-002 Magnification Adj Sub Normal ENG* [-1.8 to 1.8 / 0 / 0.1%] 2-102-004 Magnification Adj Sub Low ENG* [-1.8 to 1.8 / 0 / 0.1%] 2-103-001 Erase Margin Adj Lead Edge Width...
  • Page 729 SP2-XXX (Drum) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max/Init./Step] or CTL 2-212-001 ExeSheets Normal ENG* [1 to 500 / 500 / 1page] 2-212-002 ExeSheets ConsecutivePrint ENG* [40 to 500 / 500 / 1page] 2-221-005 LEDA Data:Display Serial Number ENG* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 2-221-009...

  • Page 730: Sp3-Xxx (Process)

    SP3-XXX (Process) 4.3 SP3-XXX (PROCESS) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or CTL [Min to Max/Init./Step] 3-098-001 Days Before End Toner ENG* [0 to 2 / 1 / 1] 3-920-001 Density Adjust Notch Setting ENG* [-6 to 3 / 0 / 1] 3-920-002 Density Adjust Mode select...

  • Page 731: Sp4-Xxx (Scanner)

    SP4-XXX (Scanner) 4.4 SP4-XXX (SCANNER) There are no Group 4 SP modes for this machine. 4-19 D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1...

  • Page 732: Sp5-Xxx (Mode) - Engine

    SP5-XXX (Mode) - Engine 4.5 SP5-XXX (MODE) - ENGINE SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or CTL [Min to Max/Init./Step] 5-801-002 Memory Clear Engine [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-803-001 INPUT Check PCB Ver [0 to 7 / 0 / 1] 5-803-002 INPUT Check Front Interlock...
  • Page 733 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or CTL [Min to Max/Init./Step] 5-804-004 OUTPUT Check DrumMt:CW:Hi [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-804-005 OUTPUT Check DrumMt:CW:Mid [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-804-006 OUTPUT Check DrumMt:CW:Low [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-804-007...
  • Page 734 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or CTL [Min to Max/Init./Step] 5-804-042 OUTPUT Check Drum QL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-804-044 OUTPUT Check Exit Junc SOL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-804-045 OUTPUT Check PCDU Fan:Light...
  • Page 735 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or CTL [Min to Max/Init./Step] 5-811-026 Machine Serial Previous EGB ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1] 5-900-001 Engine Log Upload Pattern ENG* [0 to 4 / 0 / 1] 5-900-002 Engine Log Upload Trigger...

  • Page 736: Sp5-Xxx (Mode) - Controller

    SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller 4.6 SP5-XXX (MODE) - CONTROLLER SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-001-001 All Indicators On [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 5-024-001 mm/inch Display Selection 0:mm 1:inch CTL* [0 or 1 / * / 1] NA: 1 EU, AA, CHN, TWN, KOR: 0...
  • Page 737 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] NA: 0x11100200 EU: 0x10500100 AA: 0x03100000 CHN, TWN: 0 5-401-104 Access Control Authentication Time CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1sec] 5-401-162 Access Control Extend Certification Detail CTL* [0 to 0xff / 0 / 1] 5-401-200 Access Control...
  • Page 738 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-414-002 Access Mitigation Mitigation Time CTL* [0 to 60 / 15 / 1min] 5-415-001 Password Attack Permissible Number CTL* [0 to 100 / 30 / 1] 5-415-002 Password Attack Detect Time CTL* [1 to 10 / 5 / 1]...
  • Page 739 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 10%] 5-507-128 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: Others CTL* [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1] 5-507-133 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: A4 CTL* [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1] 5-507-134 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: A5...
  • Page 740 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] Interval 1min] 5-728-001 Network Setting NAT Machine Port1 CTL* [1 to 65535 / 49101 / 1] 5-728-002 Network Setting NAT UI Port1 CTL* [1 to 65535 / 55101 / 1] 5-728-003 Network Setting NAT Machine Port2...
  • Page 741 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 55109 / 1] 5-728-019 Network Setting NAT Machine Port10 CTL* [1 to 65535 / 49110 / 1] 5-728-020 Network Setting NAT UI Port10 CTL* [1 to 65535 / 55110 / 1] 5-731-001 Counter Effect...
  • Page 742 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 1sec] 5-816-011 Remote Service Port 80 Enable CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 5-816-013 Remote Service RFU Timing CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1] 5-816-014 Remote Service RCG Error Cause [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]...
  • Page 743 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-816-201 Remote Service Regist Status [0 to 255 / 0 / 1] 5-816-202 Remote Service Letter Number CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 5-816-203 Remote Service Confirm Execute [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]...
  • Page 744 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] Setting 5-821-007 Remote Service RCG RCG Host Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] Setting 5-821-008 Remote Service RCG RCG Host URL Path CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] Setting 5-824-001 NV-RAM Data Upload...
  • Page 745 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-828-236 Network Setting Web Item visible CTL* [0x0000 to 0xffff / 0xffff / 1] 5-828-237 Network Setting Web shopping link visible CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 5-828-238 Network Setting Web Supplies Link visible CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]...
  • Page 746 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-844-100 USB Notify Unsupport CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1] 5-845-003 Delivery Server Setting Retry Interval CTL* [60 to 900 / 300 / 1sec] 5-845-004 Delivery Server Setting Number of Retries...
  • Page 747 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-856-002 Remote ROM Update Local Port [0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 5-858-001 Save Machine Info 0:OFF 1:ON CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1] 5-858-002 Save Machine Info Target(0:HDD 1:SD...
  • Page 748 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] Encryption 5-860-014 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 POP3 Server Port Number CTL* [1 to 65535 / 110 / 1] 5-860-015 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 IMAP4 Server Port CTL* [1 to 65535 / 143 Number / 1] 5-860-016...
  • Page 749 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-931-002 Life Alert Disp. PCDU CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] See NOTE below. 0: No 1: Yes 5-990-001 SP Print Mode All (Data List) [0 to 255 / 0 / 1] 5-990-002...

  • Page 750: Sp6-Xxx (Peripherals)

    SP6-XXX (Peripherals) 4.7 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS) There are no Group 6 SP modes for this machine. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 4-38...

  • Page 751: Sp7-Xxx (Data Log) - Engine

    SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Engine 4.8 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) - ENGINE SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max/Init./Step] 7-625-002 Old Counter 1 Sheets PCDU ENG* [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1sheet] 7-625-003 Old Counter 1 Sheets Fuser ENG* [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1sheet] 7-626-002...
  • Page 752 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max/Init./Step] 7-803-056 Disp. PM Counter Sheets Spr. Bank3 ENG* [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1sheet] 7-803-057 Disp. PM Counter Sheets Feed Bypa ENG* [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1sheet] 7-803-058 Disp.
  • Page 753 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max/Init./Step] 7-931-013 Toner Info. Toner End ENG* [- / 0 / -] 0: Normal (Including estimated toner near end status) N: Definite toner near end E: Toner near end 7-931-014 Toner Info.
  • Page 754 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max/Init./Step] 7-935-006 Toner Info. Log 2:Install Date ENG* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-935-007 Toner Info. Log 2:R:Total Cnt. ENG* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 7-935-008 Toner Info.
  • Page 755 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max/Init./Step] 7-940-003 Set PM Counter Sheets Fuser ENG* [0 to 9999999 / 120000 / 1sheet] 7-941-002 Set PM Dist. PCDU ENG* [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1mm] 7-941-003 Set PM Dist.
  • Page 756 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max/Init./Step] 7-979-008 CPU Reset Log Data8 ENG* [0x0000 to 0xFFFF / 0x0000 / 1] 7-979-009 CPU Reset Log Data9 ENG* [0x0000 to 0xFFFF / 0x0000 / 1] 7-979-010 CPU Reset Log Data10...

  • Page 757: Sp7-Xxx (Data Log) - Controller

    SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Controller 4.9 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) - CONTROLLER SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-401-001 Total SC SC Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1] 7-401-002 Total SC Total SC Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]...
  • Page 758 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-504-017 Paper Jam Location CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1] 7-504-020 Paper Jam Location CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1] 7-504-023 Paper Jam Location CTL*...
  • Page 759 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] Location 7-514-005 Paper Jam Count by CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1] Location 7-514-006 Paper Jam Count by CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1] Location 7-514-008 Paper Jam Count by...
  • Page 760 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-516-134 Paper Size Jam Count A5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1] 7-516-142 Paper Size Jam Count B5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1] 7-516-164...
  • Page 761 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-910-015 ROM No Scanner [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-910-018 ROM No NetworkSupport [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-910-019 ROM No Bank2...
  • Page 762 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-911-041 Firmware Version Bank4 [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-911-150 Firmware Version RPCS [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-911-151 Firmware Version [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]...

  • Page 763: Sp8-Xxx (Data Log 2) - Controller

    SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller 4.10 SP8-XXX (DATA LOG 2) - CONTROLLER SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / or CTL Step] 8-071-001 T:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-071-002 T:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages...
  • Page 764 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / or CTL Step] 8-077-006 O:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-077-007 O:Jobs/PGS 11~20 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-077-008 O:Jobs/PGS 21~50 Pages...
  • Page 765 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / or CTL Step] 8-421-023 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 9in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-421-024 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 16in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-424-001...
  • Page 766 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / or CTL Step] 8-427-015 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-427-016 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 6in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-427-017...
  • Page 767 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / or CTL Step] 8-447-003 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-447-004 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-447-005 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL*...
  • Page 768 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / or CTL Step] 8-464-001 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-464-002 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-464-003 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special...
  • Page 769 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / or CTL Step] 8-524-013 P:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-524-014 P:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-524-015 P:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor...
  • Page 770 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / or CTL Step] 8-617-006 SDK Apli Counter SDK-6 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-617-007 SDK Apli Counter SDK-7 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-617-008 SDK Apli Counter...
  • Page 771 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / or CTL Step] 8-621-030 Func Use Counter Function-030 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-621-031 Func Use Counter Function-031 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-621-032 Func Use Counter...
  • Page 772 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / or CTL Step] 8-781-001 Toner_Botol_Info. CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-801-001 Toner Remain CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%] 8-811-001 Eco Counter Eco Total...
  • Page 773 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / or CTL Step] 8-911-001 Page/Toner_Prev2 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-921-001 Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage(%):BK CTL* [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 8-921-011 Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage/P:BK...

  • Page 775: Sp Mode Tables (For Mf Model)

    SP MODE TABLES (FOR MF MODEL) R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P ag e Dat e Ad d ed/ Upd at ed/ New None...

  • Page 777: Sp1-Xxx (Feed)

    SP1-XXX (Feed) 5. SP MODE TABLES (FOR MF MODEL) 5.1 SP1-XXX (FEED) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 1-001-001 User LeadEdge Reg By-pass: Plain ENG* [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm] 1-001-002 User LeadEdge Reg Tray1: Plain ENG*...
  • Page 778 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 1-103-003 Fusing Idling center:Thresh ENG* [60 to 180 / * / 1deg] IM 350F/350: 135 IM 430Fb/430F: 143 1-103-102 Fusing Idling Reload Temp.:Side ENG* [90 to 180 / * / 1deg] IM 350F/350: 105 IM 430Fb/430F: 113 1-103-103...
  • Page 779 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] IM 430Fb/430F: 20 1-105-011 Fusing Temperature Low Power ENG* [0 to 80 / 60 / 1deg] Adjustment 1-105-012 Fusing Temperature Standby Temp: Center ENG* [140 to 185 / * / 1deg] Adjustment IM 350F/350: 155 IM 430Fb/430F: 163...
  • Page 780 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] Adjustment Upper:Thick 1-105-040 Fusing Temperature Envelope2:Roller Center ENG* [0 to 60 / * / 1deg] Adjustment IM 350F/350: 38 IM 430Fb/430F: 35 1-105-042 Fusing Temperature Transparency:Roller ENG* [0 to 60 / 20 / 1deg]...
  • Page 781 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] Adjustment Side_curl 1-105-074 Fusing Temperature Post Card:Roller ENG* [0 to 60 / 18 / 1deg] Adjustment Side_curl 1-105-076 Fusing Temperature Special Paper 1:Roller ENG* [0 to 60 / 18 / 1deg] Adjustment Side_curl 1-105-078...
  • Page 782 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] Adjustment 1-105-112 Fusing Temperature Standby Temp: Side ENG* [140 to 158 / * / 1deg] Adjustment IM 350F/350: 150 IM 430Fb/430F: 158 1-105-113 Fusing Temperature Print Ready ENG* [140 to 158 / * / 1deg]...
  • Page 783 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 1-105-144 Fusing Temperature Post Card:Roller Side ENG* [0 to 60 / * / 1deg] Adjustment IM 350F/350: 38 IM 430Fb/430F: 35 1-105-146 Fusing Temperature Special Paper 1:Roller ENG* [0 to 60 / 20 / 1deg] Adjustment...
  • Page 784 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] Adjustment Lower:M-Thick_curl 1-105-180 Fusing Temperature Paper Feed:Center ENG* [0 to 60 / 5 / 1deg] Adjustment Lower:Thick_curl 1-105-190 Fusing Temperature Envelope:Roller ENG* [0 to 60 / 45 / 1deg] Adjustment Side_low speed 1-105-192...
  • Page 785 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 1-105-228 Fusing Temperature Paper Feed:Side ENG* [0 to 60 / 5 / 1deg] Adjustment Lower:M-Thick_curl 1-105-230 Fusing Temperature Paper Feed:Side ENG* [0 to 60 / 5 / 1deg] Adjustment Lower:Thick_curl 1-105-240...
  • Page 786 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 1-108-005 Control Period Setting Print Start Time ENG* [0 to 999 / 5 / 1sec] 1-108-008 Control Period Setting Environment Adjusted ENG* [-20 to 60 / 23 / Temp 0.1deg] 1-108-009...
  • Page 787 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] Time.:B5 1sec] 1-124-016 CPM Down Setting High:2nd CPM Down ENG* [0 to 999 / 0 / 1sec] Time.:B5 1-124-017 CPM Down Setting High:3rd CPM Down ENG* [0 to 999 / 0 / 1sec] Time.:B5...
  • Page 788 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] Timer 1msec] 1-151-122 Press Adjustment Pressure [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 1-151-123 Press Adjustment Depressure [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 1-152-001 Fusing Nip Band Check 0:OFF､1:ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]...
  • Page 789 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 1-911-004 FeedDelayDivLog DivB_MF_All_Thick ENG* [0 to 1000000 / 0 / 1count] 1-911-005 FeedDelayDivLog DivC_MF_All_Nor ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1count] 1-911-006 FeedDelayDivLog DivC_MF_All_Thick ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1count]...
  • Page 790 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 1-911-022 FeedDelayDivLog DivD_T1_1_Thick ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1count] 1-911-023 FeedDelayDivLog DivD_T1_2_Nor ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1count] 1-911-024 FeedDelayDivLog DivD_T1_2_Thick ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1count]...
  • Page 791 SP1-XXX (Feed) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 1-911-040 FeedDelayDivLog DivD_T2_2_Thick ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1count] 1-912-001 1-979-001 Power Control Power Control ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 1-990-001 SC990 plt detail ENG*...

  • Page 792: Sp2-Xxx (Drum)

    SP2-XXX (Drum) 5.2 SP2-XXX (DRUM) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 2-102-002 Magnification Adj Sub Normal ENG* [-1.8 to 1.8 / 0 / 0.1%] 2-102-004 Magnification Adj Sub Low ENG* [-1.8 to 1.8 / 0 / 0.1%] 2-103-001 Erase Margin Adj Lead Edge Width...
  • Page 793 SP2-XXX (Drum) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 0: One Side 1: Both Sides 2-131-004 SFBVSC:Execution Correction Clear [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 2-132-001 SFBVSC:Configuratio Paper Size (Final) ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 2-132-002 SFBVSC:Configuratio Paper Size...
  • Page 794 SP2-XXX (Drum) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 2-132-017 SFBVSC:Configuratio Edge Margine ENG* [0 to 15 / 5 / 1] 2-132-018 SFBVSC:Configuratio Skew Detect Area ENG* [0 to 15 / 3 / 1] 2-132-019 SFBVSC:Configuratio Number of Scan...
  • Page 795 SP2-XXX (Drum) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 2-149-005 SFBVSC:Result Right Edge Area ENG* [1 to 1272 / 1 / 1] 2-149-006 SFBVSC:Result Shift ENG* [-4 to 4 / 0 / 1dot] 2-149-007 SFBVSC:Result Left Mag.

  • Page 796: Sp3-Xxx (Process)

    SP3-XXX (Process) 5.3 SP3-XXX (PROCESS) SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or CTL [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 3-098-001 Days Before End Toner ENG* [0 to 2 / 1 / 1] 3-920-001 Density Adjust Notch Setting ENG* [-6 to 3 / 0 / 1] 3-920-002 Density Adjust...

  • Page 797: Sp4-Xxx (Scanner)

    SP4-XXX (Scanner) 5.4 SP4-XXX (SCANNER) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 4-008-001 Sub Scan Magnification ENG* [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%] Adj. 4-010-001 Sub Scan Registration Adj. ENG* [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1mm] 4-011-001 Main Scan Registration ENG*...
  • Page 798 SP4-XXX (Scanner) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 4-016-007 DF Scan Bk 600 x 300dpi [0 to 1 / 0 / 1STEP] Simplex Mode 4-016-008 DF Scan FC 600 x 600dpi [0 to 1 / 0 / 1STEP] Simplex Mode 4-016-009 DF Scan...
  • Page 799 SP4-XXX (Scanner) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7: Scanned+Slant Grid C 8: Scanned+Slant Grid D 4-429-001 Select Copy Data Security Copying ENG* [0 to 3 / 3 / 1] 4-429-002 Select Copy Data Security Scanning ENG* [0 to 3 / 3 / 1]...
  • Page 800 SP4-XXX (Scanner) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 4-714-001 CIS GB Adj. Value: B ENG* [-384 to 255 / -85 / 1digit] 4-723-001 OUTPUT Check Scanner Lamp: Color [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 4-745-001 CIS Scan Adjust Error White level...
  • Page 801 SP4-XXX (Scanner) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 4-903-001 Filter Setting Ind Dot Erase: Text ENG* [0 to 7 / 0 / 1] 4-903-002 Filter Setting Ind Dot Erase: ENG* [0 to 7 / 0 / 1] Generation Copy 4-905-001 Select Gradation Level...

  • Page 802: Sp5-Xxx (Mode) - Engine

    SP5-XXX (Mode) - Engine 5.5 SP5-XXX (MODE) - ENGINE SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-186-001 RK4: Setting ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-801-002 Memory Clear Engine [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-803-001 INPUT Check PCB Ver [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]...
  • Page 803 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-803-088 Input Check Bank2 Trans SN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-803-089 Input Check Bank3 Trans SN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-803-200 INPUT Check Scanner HP Sensor [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]...
  • Page 804 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-804-033 OUTPUT Check PCDUFan:Left:High [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-804-034 OUTPUT Check PCDUFan:Left:Low [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-804-035 OUTPUT Check PSU Fan: High [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]...
  • Page 805 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-804-179 Output Check Bank3 Feed CL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-804-202 OUTPUT Check Scanner Lamp [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-810-001 SC Reset Fusing SC Reset...

  • Page 806: Sp5-Xxx (Mode) - Controller

    SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller 5.6 SP5-XXX (MODE) - CONTROLLER SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-009-201 Add display CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1] language 5-009-202 Add display 9-16 CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1] language 5-009-203 Add display...
  • Page 807 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-073-005 Supply Part Drum Unit CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] Replacement Switches display from 0: Service maintenance Operation Type User or Service 1: User maintenance 5-074-002 Home Key...
  • Page 808 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-120-001 Mode Clear Opt. 0:Yes 1:StandBy 2:No CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1] Counter Removal 5-121-001 Counter Up Timing 0:Feed 1:Exit CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-127-001...
  • Page 809 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 480, KOR: 540 5-305-101 Auto Off Set Auto Off Limit Set CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-307-001 Daylight Saving Setting CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] Time...
  • Page 810 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-402-101 Access Control SDKJ1 Limit Setting CTL* [0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1] 5-402-102 Access Control SDKJ2 Limit Setting CTL* [0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1] 5-402-103 Access Control SDKJ3 Limit Setting...
  • Page 811 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-402-146 Access Control SDKJ6 ProductID CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1] 5-402-147 Access Control SDKJ7 ProductID CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1] 5-402-148 Access Control SDKJ8 ProductID...
  • Page 812 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-413-002 Lockout Setting Lockout Threshold CTL* [1 to 10 / 5 / 1] 5-413-003 Lockout Setting Cancelation On/Off CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-413-004 Lockout Setting Cancelation Time...
  • Page 813 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-431-012 External Auth User Group CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] Preset 5-431-020 External Auth User Mail CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] Preset 5-431-030 External Auth User...
  • Page 814 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 43ppm model: 12 35ppm model: 15 5-505-002 Error Alarm Threshold CTL* [1 to 99 / 5 / 1] 5-507-001 Supply/CC Alarm Paper Supply Alarm CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-507-003...
  • Page 815 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-513-002 PartsAlermlevelCou CTL* [1 to 9999 / 300 / 1] 5-514-001 PartsAlermlev Normal CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 5-514-002 PartsAlermlev CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-515-001...
  • Page 816 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-728-001 Network Setting NAT Machine Port1 CTL* [1 to 65535 / 49101 / 1] 5-728-002 Network Setting NAT UI Port1 CTL* [1 to 65535 / 55101 / 1] 5-728-003 Network Setting NAT Machine Port2...
  • Page 817 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] Cnt(Paper->Combine) 5-734-001 PDF Setting PDF/A Fixed CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 5-741-001 Node Authentication CTL* [1 to 255 / 60 / 1sec] Timuout 5-745-211 DeemedPowerCons...
  • Page 818 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] Password Change Scrn 5-755-002 Display Setting Hide Administrator [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] Password Change Scrn 5-758-001 RemoteUI Setting Authentication CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-759-001 Machine Limit Count...
  • Page 819 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-764-002 NFC Setting Encrypted CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] Communication Permission 5-764-003 NFC Setting Access Port1 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 8081 / 1] 5-764-004 NFC Setting Access Port2...
  • Page 820 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-801-019 Memory Clear [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 5-801-020 Cleae Memory Web Uapli [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 5-801-021 Memory Clear [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 5-801-023...
  • Page 821 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-816-032 Remote Service Connect Send Delay CTL* [0 to 255 / 5 / 1sec] 5-816-033 Remote Service Max Multipart CTL* [0 to 255 / 10 / 1] 5-816-034 Remote Service Firm DL Interval...
  • Page 822 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-816-201 Remote Service Regist Status [0 to 255 / 0 / 1] 5-816-202 Remote Service Letter Number CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 5-816-203 Remote Service Confirm Execute...
  • Page 823 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-821-008 Remote Service RCG Host URL Path CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] RCG Setting 5-824-001 NV-RAM Data [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] Upload 5-825-001 NV-RAM Data...
  • Page 824 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] Setting 5-828-236 Network Setting Web Item visible CTL* [0x0000 to 0xffff / 0xffff / 5-828-237 Network Setting Web shopping link visible CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 5-828-238 Network Setting Web Supplies Link visible CTL*...
  • Page 825 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-836-011 Capture Setting Capture Setting: Copy CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-836-012 Capture Setting Capture Setting: Doc. CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] Svr.
  • Page 826 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-836-104 Capture Setting Primary srv URL path CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 5-836-111 Capture Setting Secondary srv IP CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00 / 0] address 5-836-112 Capture Setting...
  • Page 827 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 0x0403 / 0] 5-844-004 Device Release Number CTL* [0 to 9999 / 100 / 1] 5-844-005 Fixed USB Port CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1] 5-844-006 PnP Model Name CTL*...
  • Page 828 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-846-001 UCS Setting Machine ID (for Delivery CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] Server) 5-846-002 UCS Setting Machine ID Clear (for CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] Delivery Server)
  • Page 829 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-846-098 UCS Setting Bit SW2 CTL* [0x00 to 0xff / 0x04 / 1] 5-846-099 UCS Setting Bit SW CTL* [0x00 to 0xff / 0x0f / 1] 5-846-100 UCS Setting Initialize Suprvisor...
  • Page 830 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] WebService (Lower 4bits) 5-848-042 Web Service Plaintext Permission CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 5-848-043 Web Service The number of CTL* [0 to 100 / 10 / 1] transaction generation 5-848-044...
  • Page 831 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-858-003 Collect Machine Info Make Log Trace Dir CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 0] 5-858-101 Collect Machine Info Failure Occuring Date CTL* [0 to 20371212 / 0 / 1] 5-858-102...
  • Page 832 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] Address 5-861-201 Account Setting Send Domain1 [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 5-861-202 Account Setting Send Domain2 [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 5-861-203 Account Setting Send Domain3...
  • Page 833 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-878-001 Option Setup Data Overwrite Security [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 5-878-004 Option Setup OCR Dictionary [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 5-881-001 Fixed Phrase Block [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]...
  • Page 834 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-892-001 Engine Data Check CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 5-893-001 SDK Application SDK-1 [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] Counter 5-893-002 SDK Application...
  • Page 835 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 0: No 1: Yes 5-931-002 Life Alert Disp. PCDU CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] See NOTE below 0: No 1: Yes 5-967-001 Copy Server : Set (0:ON 1:OFF)
  • Page 836 SP5-XXX (Mode) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 5-993-004 SP Text Logging Data [0 to 255 / 0 / 0] Mode(Privacy) 5-993-005 SP Text Diagnostic Report [0 to 255 / 0 / 0] Mode(Privacy) 5-993-006 SP Text...

  • Page 837: Sp6-Xxx (Peripherals)

    SP6-XXX (Peripherals) 5.7 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 6-006-001 ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist:Face ENG* [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm] 6-006-002 ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist:Back ENG* [-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1mm] 6-006-010 ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist...
  • Page 838 SP6-XXX (Peripherals) SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 6-030-002 DF Hinge Hinge Open Counter State ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 6-030-003 DF Hinge Hinge Open Counter Clear [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 6-040-001 Page Keeper Mount Select...

  • Page 839: Sp7-Xxx (Data Log) - Engine

    SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Engine 5.8 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) - ENGINE SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-625-002 Old Counter 1 Sheets PCDU ENG* [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1sheet] 7-625-003 Old Counter 1 Sheets Fuser ENG* [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1sheet] 7-626-002...
  • Page 840 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-803-009 Disp. PM Counter Sheets ADF Feed ENG* [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1sheet] 7-803-027 Disp. PM Counter Usage ADF Pad ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%] 7-803-028 Disp.
  • Page 841 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-804-056 Reset PM Counter Spr. Bank3 [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-804-057 Reset PM Counter Feed Bypass [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-804-058 Reset PM Counter Spr.
  • Page 842 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-931-017 Toner Info. Unit Output Cnt. ENG* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1sheet] 7-931-018 Toner Info. Install Date ENG* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-931-019 Toner Info.
  • Page 843 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-935-014 Toner Info. Log 4:Install Date ENG* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-935-015 Toner Info. Log 4:R:Total Cnt. ENG* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 7-935-016 Toner Info.
  • Page 844 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-953-002 Remain Day(Dist.) PCDU ENG* [0 to 255 / 255 / 1days] 7-953-003 Remain Day(Dist.) Fuser ENG* [0 to 255 / 255 / 1days] 7-955-002 Remain Pages PCDU...
  • Page 845 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Engine SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-979-002 CPU Reset Log Data2 ENG* [0x0000 to 0xFFFF / 0x0000 / 1] 7-979-003 CPU Reset Log Data3 ENG* [0x0000 to 0xFFFF / 0x0000 / 1] 7-979-004 CPU Reset Log Data4...

  • Page 846: Sp7-Xxx (Data Log) - Controller

    SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Controller 5.9 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) - CONTROLLER SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-401-001 Total SC SC Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0] 7-401-002 Total SC Total SC Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]...
  • Page 847 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-504-009 Paper Jam Location Duplex: No Feed CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0] 7-504-013 Paper Jam Location Tray2 Vertical Trans Sensor CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0] Late Jam...
  • Page 848 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-505-081 Original Jam Detection Bypass Set Sensor Jam CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0] 7-505-097 Original Jam Detection Timing Error Jam CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0] 7-505-098...
  • Page 849 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-508-002 Original Jam History Latest 1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-508-003 Original Jam History Latest 2 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-508-004 Original Jam History Latest 3...
  • Page 850 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] Location 7-514-035 Paper Jam Count by Tray3:No Feed Continuous CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0] Location 7-514-036 Paper Jam Count by Tray4:No Feed Continuous CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]...
  • Page 851 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] Detection 7-515-100 Original Jam Count by Motor Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0] Detection 7-516-006 Paper Size Jam Count A5 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]...
  • Page 852 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-520-034 Update Log Auto:Piecemark4 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-520-035 Update Log Auto:Piecemark5 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-520-041 Update Log Auto:Version1...
  • Page 853 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] Reset 7-826-001 MF Error Counter Error Total CTL* [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 7-826-002 MF Error Counter Error Staple CTL* [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 7-827-001 MF Error Counter [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]...
  • Page 854 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-910-153 ROM No [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-910-154 ROM No [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-910-156 ROM No [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-910-157 ROM No...
  • Page 855 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-911-001 Firmware Version System/Copy [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-911-002 Firmware Version Engine [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-911-003 Firmware Version Lcdc...
  • Page 856 SP7-XXX (Data Log) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] 7-911-201 Firmware Version Copy [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-911-202 Firmware Version NetworkDocBox [0 to 0 / 0 / 0] 7-911-203 Firmware Version [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]...

  • Page 857: Sp8-Xxx (Data Log 2) - Controller

    SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller 5.10 SP8-XXX (DATA LOG 2) - CONTROLLER SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-001-001 T:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-002-001 C:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]...
  • Page 858 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-047-001 O:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-051-001 T:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-052-001 C:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL*...
  • Page 859 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-062-013 C:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-062-014 C:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-062-015 C:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor...
  • Page 860 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-065-001 S:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-065-002 S:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-065-003 S:FIN Jobs Staple...
  • Page 861 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-067-005 O:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-067-006 O:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-067-007 O:FIN Jobs Other...
  • Page 862 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-072-011 C:Jobs/PGS 301~500 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-072-012 C:Jobs/PGS 501~700 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-072-013 C:Jobs/PGS 701~1000 Pages...
  • Page 863 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-075-005 S:Jobs/PGS 5 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-075-006 S:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-075-007 S:Jobs/PGS 11~20 Pages...
  • Page 864 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-077-013 O:Jobs/PGS 701~1000 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-077-014 O:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-081-001 T:Smart Device Smart Device...
  • Page 865 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL Jobs/WSD/DSM 8-171-003 T:Deliv CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] Jobs/WSD/DSM 8-175-001 S:Deliv CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] Jobs/WSD/DSM 8-175-002 S:Deliv...
  • Page 866 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-231-007 Scan PGS/Mode ID card Feeder CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-241-001 T:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-241-002 T:Scan PGS/Org...
  • Page 867 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-246-005 L:Scan PGS/Org CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-246-011 L:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-251-001 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL*...
  • Page 868 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-303-001 F:Scan PGS/Size CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-303-002 F:Scan PGS/Size CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-303-003 F:Scan PGS/Size CTL*...
  • Page 869 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-311-001 T:Scan PGS/Rez 1200dpi ~ CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-311-002 T:Scan PGS/Rez 600dpi~1199dpi CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-311-003 T:Scan PGS/Rez 400dpi~599dpi...
  • Page 870 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-421-003 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Book> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-421-004 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-421-005 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb...
  • Page 871 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-422-020 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-422-022 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-423-001...
  • Page 872 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-424-021 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 6in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-424-022 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-424-023...
  • Page 873 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-426-020 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 4in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-426-022 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-426-024...
  • Page 874 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-436-001 L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-436-002 L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-436-003 L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp...
  • Page 875 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-443-007 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-443-008 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-443-009 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL*...
  • Page 876 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-446-007 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-446-008 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-446-009 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL*...
  • Page 877 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-461-001 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-461-002 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-461-003 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special...
  • Page 878 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-466-005 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-466-006 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-466-007 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type...
  • Page 879 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-514-005 P:PrtPGS/Emul CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-514-006 P:PrtPGS/Emul GL/GL2 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-514-007 P:PrtPGS/Emul CTL*...
  • Page 880 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-522-004 C:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-522-005 C:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-522-006 C:PrtPGS/FIN Punch...
  • Page 881 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-524-008 P:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-524-009 P:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-524-010 P:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold...
  • Page 882 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-526-012 L:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-526-013 L:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-526-014 L:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind...
  • Page 883 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-564-003 P:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-564-004 P:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]...
  • Page 884 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-617-009 SDK Apli Counter SDK-9 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-617-010 SDK Apli Counter SDK-10 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-617-011 SDK Apli Counter...
  • Page 885 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-621-033 Func Use Counter Function-033 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-621-034 Func Use Counter Function-034 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-621-035 Func Use Counter...
  • Page 886 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-641-001 T:IFAX TX PGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-643-001 F:IFAX TX PGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-651-001 T:S-to-Email PGS CTL*...
  • Page 887 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-715-001 S:Scan PGS/Comp JPEG/JPEG2000 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-715-002 S:Scan PGS/Comp TIFF(Multi/Single) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-715-003 S:Scan PGS/Comp CTL*...
  • Page 888 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-811-051 Eco Counter Sync Eco Total CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-811-054 Eco Counter Sync Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-811-055...
  • Page 889 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-941-004 Machine Status Low Power Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-941-005 Machine Status Off Mode Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-941-006...
  • Page 890 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2) - Controller SP No. Large Category Small Category [Min to Max / Init. / Step] or CTL 8-999-003 Admin. Counter List Copy: BW CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-999-007 Admin. Counter List Printer: BW CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] 8-999-010...

  • Page 891: Scanner Sp Mode

    Scanner SP Mode 5.11 SCANNER SP MODE 5.11.1 SP1-XXX (SYSTEM AND OTHERS) 1001 [Scan Nv Version] Operates automatic initialization to ensure that scanner NV is initialized if necessary. To do this SP, specify the version of scanner NV within 9 characters. “Function name”_”Machine code”_”Serial number”...

  • Page 892: Sp2-Xxx, Sp3-Xxx (Scanning-Image Quality)

    Scanner SP Mode 1-012-001 0:NO 1:YES CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: No, 1: Yes 1013 [Scan to Media Device Setting] On or off multimedia function 1-013-001 0:OFF 1:ON CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON 1014 [Scan to Folder Pass Input Set]...
  • Page 893 Scanner SP Mode settings that can be selected at the operation panel. 2-021-001 Comp 1: 5-95 CTL* [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ] 2-021-002 Comp 2: 5-95 [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ] 2-021-003 Comp 3: 5-95 [5 to 95 / 65 / 1 /step ] 2-021-004...

  • Page 895: Software Configuration

    SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P ag e Dat e Ad d ed/ Upd at ed/ New None...

  • Page 897: Printing Features

    Printing Features 6. SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION 6.1 PRINTING FEATURES 6.1.1 BEHAVIOR OF USB PRINTER DETECTION An MFP/LP connected via USB sends its product name and unique serial number. With the data, the machine determines whether requires a printer driver for the USB device to be installed. SP5-844-005 allows you to change how to determine the MFP/LP requires a printer driver installation: •...

  • Page 898: Pdl Detection By The Printer System, Pcl Interpreter And Ps Interpreter

    Printing Features PDL detection by the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS interpreter There are 3 components in the printer which can perform Auto PDL Detection: Printer system: Uses a set of triggers unique to PCL5, PS or PDF. Up to 2KB from the start of the job can be searched for triggers.

  • Page 899: Triggers

    Printing Features PDL selection (PCL5 or PS (including PDF)) at the beginning of the job: performed by the printer system PDL switching from PCL5 to PS: performed by the PCL interpreter and the printer system PDL switching from PS to PCL5: performed by the PS interpreter and the printer system Triggers Printer system PCL5...

  • Page 900: Some Possible Problems

    Printing Features %PDF- triggers %!PS-Adobe-M.nPDF- (*M, n=numeric) * "userdict" is excluded by configuring Printer Bit Switch 5-3=1. Up to 2KB from the start of the job can be searched for triggers. • By configuring Printer Bit Switch 5-3=1: • "%%" can be added to the PS triggers •...

  • Page 901: Print Images Rotation

    Printing Features BitSW 5-3=1: "%%" is used as a printer system PS trigger. The reason that "%%" is not included as a trigger by default, is that a string of text in the body of the job such as the below, could result in a false positive. This would trigger a switch and result garbled output.

  • Page 902: Pjl Ustatus

    Printing Features Bit Switch #5-6=0: Bit Switch #5-6=1: Used in conjunction with Bit Switch #5-6, Orientation Auto Detect for PS/PDF jobs • might cause unexpected results. 6.1.4 PJL USTATUS Printer Bit Switch description Bit Switch 9-4 These control the way PJL USTATUS returns page count totals in cases where multiple copies of a job are being printed.
  • Page 903 Printing Features This emulates more recent HP PCL firmware specs. For example, consider 3 copies of a 3 page job: 9-4 = 0 @PJL USTATUS JOB START NAME="TEST_page1-3" @PJL USTATUS PAGE @PJL USTATUS PAGE @PJL USTATUS PAGE @PJL USTATUS JOB NAME="TEST_page1-3"...

  • Page 904: Adjustment

    Printing Features @PJL USTATUS PAGE @PJL USTATUS PAGE @PJL USTATUS PAGE 6@PJL USTATUS PAGE @PJL USTATUS PAGE @PJL USTATUS PAGE @PJL USTATUS JOB NAME="Microsoft Word - TEST_page1-3" PAGES=9 <comment> The page count of all three copies is returned.</comment> 6.1.5 ADJUSTMENT User Code Authentication to Restrict Color Printing The Effect of Bit Switch 8-3 on Host Printing with User Code Authentication This page explains the difference between the default configuration of the device and the effect...
  • Page 905 Printing Features (*1) In a PS job, the command is RCsetdevicecolor, and divided by its value, (gray) or (cmyk). (*2) In a PS job, the command is {setuserinfo}. Bit Switch 8-3 Enabled (Set to 1) Bit Switch 8-3 changes the way a GW device handles the PJL SET DATAMODE (or RCsetdevicecolor) command.
  • Page 906 Printing Features (*1) In a PS job, the command is RCsetdevicecolor, and divided by its value, (gray) or (cmyk). (*2) In a PS job, the command is {setuserinfo}. D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 6-10...

  • Page 907: Scanner Features

    Scanner Features 6.2 SCANNER FEATURES 6.2.1 DISPLAY SETTINGS OF RECENTLY USED SCAN DESTINATION Configuring the scanner interface so that the most recently used scan destination is cleared. Whether the MFP clears the most recently used scan destination, can be configured using Scanner SP 1-012-001.

  • Page 908: Typical Example

    Scanner Features Explanation This is an SMTP authentication issue that aborts transmission of an already started Scan to Email. Currently this has only been reproduced using MS-Exchange server. MS-Exchange requires that all of the following match: The sender's address in the "MAIL FROM" field. This is also known as the "envelope sender"...

  • Page 909: The Qualification Switching Of Scan To Folder

    Scanner Features The administrator email address is configurable in [User Tools] > [Machine Features] > [System Settings] > [File Transfer] > [Administrator's Email Address]. 6.2.3 THE QUALIFICATION SWITCHING OF SCAN TO FOLDER Determining which account Scan to Folder uses to access a scan destination and the effects of System SP 5-846-021.
  • Page 910 Scanner Features D0AP/D0C4/D0C5/D0C6/M0BQ/M0D1 6-14...

  • Page 911: Management Features

    Management Features 6.3 MANAGEMENT FEATURES 6.3.1 HOW TO DISABLE THE DOCUMENT SERVER FUNCTION Enter 'Copy' SP mode. Change SP5-967-001 to 1. (0:ON 1:OFF) Reboot the machine. When the above SP mode (SP5-967-001) is OFF (=1), both the Document Server • and Locked Print functions will be disabled.

  • Page 912: Security Features

    Security Features 6.4 SECURITY FEATURES 6.4.1 HOW TO RESTRICT ACCESS TO THE WIM JOB MENU Enter 'Printer' SP mode. Set SP5-888-001 0: (default): "Job" menu is enabled. 1: "Job" menu is disabled. This setting takes effect only if user authentication (other than User Code auth.) is •...
  • Page 913 Security Features The most restrictive result of combining these three configurations will take priority. So for example: Bit 0 = 0 Bit 1 = 1 Bit 7 = 1 As Bit 1 = 1 is the most restrictive of the three, it will take presedence over the other two and only administrators will be able to access the DS via WIM.
  • Page 914 D0C5/D0C6/D0C4/D0AP FAX UNIT R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P ag e Dat e Ad d ed/ Upd at ed/ New None...
  • Page 916 (D0C5/D0C6/D0C4/D0AP) FAX UNIT TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INSTALLATION ................1 1.1 FAX UNIT OPTIONS ......................1 1.1.1 HANDSET HS1010 (M444-38) (ONLY FOR NA) ........... 1 Accessories ........................ 1 Installation Procedure ....................2 Configuring the Handset .................... 3 1.1.2 FAX CONNECTION UNIT TYPE M34 (D3EM-03) ..........4 Overview of Fax Connection Unit................
  • Page 917 Cannot Send via VoIP Gateway................41 Cannot Send by Alias Fax Number................42 3.4.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION .................... 43 Cannot Receive via IP Address/Host Name............43 Cannot Receive by VoIP Gateway................44 Cannot Receive by Alias Fax Number..............44 4.
  • Page 918 5.2 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS ....................119 5.3 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS .................... 120 5.4 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION ..................121 D0C5/D0C6/D0C4/D0AP FAX UNIT...
  • Page 920 SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations are as follows: Symbol What it means Clip ring Screw Connector Clamp E-ring Flat Flexible Cable Timing Belt Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed Black Cyan Magenta...

  • Page 922: Installation

    Fax Unit Options 1. INSTALLATION 1.1 FAX UNIT OPTIONS 1.1.1 HANDSET HS1010 (M444-38) (ONLY FOR NA) Accessories Installation of this unit requires the following components. Other components included in this kit are not used for installation on this machine. Description Q’ty Remarks Handset with ferrite core...

  • Page 923: Installation Procedure

    Fax Unit Options Installation Procedure Remove the protective tape from the handset bracket. Attach the bracket to the left side of the machine, as shown below. Remove the inquiry card from the handset cradle. The card can be easily removed by pushing it from the back of the handset. D0C5/D0C6/D0C4/D0AP FAX UNIT...

  • Page 924: Configuring The Handset

    Fax Unit Options Fix the handset cradle to the handset bracket by turning the screws with a coin. Place the inquiry card back in the handset cradle. Place the handset on the handset cradle, and connect the handset cord to the external telephone connector.

  • Page 925: Fax Connection Unit Type M34 (D3Em-03)

    Fax Unit Options Adjusting the handset bell volume With a thin, pointed object, adjust the bell volume using the volume switch. High : H • Low : L • • No sound : OFF 1.1.2 FAX CONNECTION UNIT TYPE M34 (D3EM-03) Overview of Fax Connection Unit This unit allows a machine without the fax unit installed (“Client-side Machine”) to send and receive faxes via a machine with the fax unit installed (“Remote Machine”).

  • Page 926: Installing The Fax Connection Unit In The Client-Side And Remote Machines

    Fax Unit Options Order of Fax Connection Unit installation procedure: Install the Fax Connection Unit in the Remote Machine (fax unit installed). Install the Fax Connection Unit in the Client-side Machine (no fax unit installed). Register the Client-side Machine in the Remote Machine. •...

  • Page 927: Registering The Client Machine(S)

    Fax Unit Options Plug in, and then turn ON the main power. Move the Fax Connection Unit application from the SD card in SD slot 2 (lower) to the SD card in SD slot 1 (upper) with SP5-873-001. Turn OFF the main power. Remove the SD card from SD slot 2 (lower), and then keep it in a safe place (see “SD Card Appli Move”...

  • Page 928: Registering The Remote Machine

    Fax Unit Options Press [Connection Test] to check the connection with the client-side machine. If an error message is displayed, check the network connection with the client-side machine and make sure that the IP address of the client-side machine is correct. Press [OK] after “Connection Test”...
  • Page 929 Fax Unit Options On the Client-side Machine(s): Press [User Tools] > [Machine Features] > [System Setting] > [Administrator Tools]. Press [Program/Change/Delete Remote Machine]. Enter the IP address or hostname of the Remote Machine. Press one of the machine registration lines, and then enter the IP address or hostname of the Remote Machine.

  • Page 930: Configuring The Remote Reception Settings

    Fax Unit Options Press [OK] after “Connection Test” has been successfully done. Press [Exit] to terminate the System Settings. Configuring the Remote Reception Settings Do the following procedure to enable the Client-side Machine(s) to receive faxes via the Remote Machine. You can forward or route received documents per line or special sender. •...
  • Page 931 Fax Unit Options Select the Special Sender. Press [Remote Reception Setting per Sender]. Press [On] and [Remote Machine]. Enter an IP address or a hostname of the client-side machine to connect. Press [OK] to exit from the setting. D0C5/D0C6/D0C4/D0AP FAX UNIT...

  • Page 932: Replacement And Adjustment

    FCU Board 2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 2.1 FCU BOARD The FCU board of the service part contains the following items included in the package. FCU board • • • Jumper • Bracket When you replace the FCU board, transfer the SRAM data from the old FCU board to the new FCU board.
  • Page 933 FCU Board Open the rear cover [A]. Remove the HDD cover [A] and the connector cover [B] and [C]. Use a flathead screwdriver to remove the connector cover [B]. D0C5/D0C6/D0C4/D0AP FAX UNIT...
  • Page 934 FCU Board Remove the right cover [A]. Remove the controller box lower cover [A]. Disconnect the harness, and then pull out the interface cover [A] to remove it. D0C5/D0C6/D0C4/D0AP FAX UNIT...
  • Page 935 FCU Board Remove the FCU [A]. Attach the jumper [A] on the removed FCU board [B]. The jumper comes with the new FCU board. 10. Change the position of the battery jumper [A] on the new FCU board [B]. If the battery jumper is not in the correct position, SC820 will occur. D0C5/D0C6/D0C4/D0AP FAX UNIT...
  • Page 936 FCU Board 11. Attach the new FCU board to the interface cover. 12. Attach the interface cover to the machine, and then connect the harness. 13. Connect one end of the supplied FFC [A] into the CN603 connector [B] on the new FCU board.
  • Page 937 FCU Board 15. Attach the bracket [A] above to the controller box. 16. Attach the old FCU board [A] to the bracket temporarily. Mount the PCB and bracket so both are horizontal. If the contact surface of bracket [A] cuts into the base plate as shown below, this could cause a short circuit between the element and the bracket and damage the PCB.
  • Page 938 FCU Board The FFC connector has the lock lever [A], so tilt the lever to lock the FFC. 18. Turn the main power ON. 19. The SRAM data transfer begins. Transfer is complete when a beep sounds. The volume of the beeping is set to the same level as the speaker volume. •...

  • Page 939: Troubleshooting

    Error Codes 3. TROUBLESHOOTING 3.1 ERROR CODES If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the error code display and on the service report.
  • Page 940 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action • Check for line problems. Cross-reference See error code 0-04. • 0-06 The other terminal did not reply to Check the line connection. • Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable • equalizer settings. •...
  • Page 941 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action • Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. Replace the FCU. • Cross-reference See error code 0-08. • 0-15 The other terminal is not capable of The other terminal is not capable of accepting the specific functions.
  • Page 942 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action • The remote machine may be defective or may have disconnected. Cross-reference • Maximum interval between EOLs and between ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 0-22 The signal from the other end was •...
  • Page 943 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action receiving machine cannot handle. manufacturer. 0-33 The data reception (not ECM) is not • Check the line connection. completed within 10 minutes. • The other terminal may have a defective modem/FCU. 0-52 Polarity changed during Check the line connection.
  • Page 944 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action waiting for a V.21 signal. • If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back to T.30 mode. 0-80 The line was disconnected due to a • The guard timer expired while starting these timeout in V.34 phase 2 –...
  • Page 945 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action frame. 2-11 Only one V.21 connection flag was • Replace the FCU. received 2-12 Modem clock irregularity Replace the FCU. • 2-13 Modem initialization error Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. •...
  • Page 946 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 5-10 DCR timer expired • Replace the FCU. 5-20 Storage impossible because of a Temporary memory shortage. • lack of memory • Test the SAF memory. 5-21 Memory overflow 5-23 Print data error when printing a Test the SAF memory.
  • Page 947 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action • Defective remote terminal. 6-21 V.21 flag detected during high speed • The other terminal may be defective or modem communication incompatible. 6-22 The machine resets the sequence Check for line noise. • because of an abnormal handshake If the same error occurs frequently, replace •...
  • Page 948 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 14-02 No Service by SMTP Service (421) • SMTP server operating incorrectly, or the destination for direct SMTP sending is not correct. • Contact the system administrator and check that the SMTP server has the correct settings and operates correctly.
  • Page 949 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action of space remaining on the HDD where the target folder is located. • Insufficient free space on the HDD at the target destination for SMTP direct sending. Contact the system administrator and check the amount of space remaining on the target HDD.
  • Page 950 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 14-14 Security Locked File Error • Update the software because of the defective software. 14-15 Mail Data Error • The transmitting a mail is interrupted via DCS due to the incorrect data. Update the software because of the defective •...
  • Page 951 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action the mail address of the network administrator is registered. 14-34 Address designated in the domain • Operational error in normal mail sending or for SMTP sending does not exist direct SMTP sending. Check the address selected in the address •...
  • Page 952 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action • Check if the settings of the SMTP are correct. Check the DNS server. • Check if the DNS server works normally and is connected to the network. Check if the settings of the DNS server are •...
  • Page 953 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 15-13 Receive Buffer Full • Occurs only during manual reception. Transmission cannot be received due to insufficient buffer space. The buffer is being used for mail send or Scan-to-Email. 15-14 Mail Header Format Error The mail header is not standard format.
  • Page 954 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action • Page size error The page size was larger than A3. • Compression error • • File was compressed with other than MH, MR, or MMR. 15-63 TIFF Parameter Error The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be received because the TIFF header is incorrect: The TIFF file attachment is a type not •...
  • Page 955 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action • Destinations are full so the final and transfer destinations could not be created. 15-92 Memory Overflow • Transmission could not be received because memory overflowed during the transaction. 15-93 Memory Access Error Transaction could not complete due to a •...
  • Page 956 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 22-05 No G3 parameter confirmation • Defective FCU board or firmware. answer 22-06 The fax number / e-mail address • Software error. entered or selected by the user does Install lateset FCU firmware. not match that of the destination. FCU board defective •...

  • Page 957: Fax Connection Unit Error Codes

    Fax Connection Unit Error Codes 3.2 FAX CONNECTION UNIT ERROR CODES 3.2.1 ERROR CODE - 01 Error Suggested Cause Action Code 01(1) IPv4/IPv6 not enabled Enable IPv4 and IPv6 01(3) “Cancel” is pressed by user. 01(4) A false connection ID is being used. Check that the network is established.

  • Page 958: Error Code - 06

    Fax Connection Unit Error Codes 3.2.4 ERROR CODE - 04 Error Suggested Cause Action Code Although the same user registered to the Remote Register the same user to • Machine and Client-side Machine, the user name both the Remote Machine and password for login are unmatched between the and Client-side Machine.
  • Page 959 Fax Connection Unit Error Codes Error Code - 08 Error Suggested Cause Action Code 08(1) A Client-side Machine connects to Connect to the Remote Machine. • • other Client-side Machine. Register the Client-side Machine to • The Client-side Machine not registered the Remote Machine as a •...

  • Page 960: Ifax Troubleshooting

    IFAX Troubleshooting 3.3 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of the network is causing the problem. Communication Item Action [Remarks] Route General LAN 1. Connection with the Check that the LAN cable is connected to •...
  • Page 961 IFAX Troubleshooting Communication Item Action [Remarks] Route 3. E-mail server • Make sure that the client devices which have an account in the server can send/receive e-mail. [Ask the administrator to check. Send a test e-mail with the machine’s own number as the destination.

  • Page 962: Ip-Fax Troubleshooting

    IP-Fax Troubleshooting 3.4 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING 3.4.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name Check Point Action LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection. Specified IP address/hostname correct? Check the IP address/hostname. Firewall/NAT is installed? Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using another method (Fax, Internet Fax) Did transmission send manually? Manual sending not supported.

  • Page 963: Cannot Send By Alias Fax Number

    IP-Fax Troubleshooting Is the IP address/hostname of the Check the IP address/hostname. specified Gateway correct? Does the number of the specified fax Check the remote fax number. correct? Firewall/NAT is installed? Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using another method (Fax, Internet Fax) Did transmission send manually? Manual sending not supported.

  • Page 964: Ip-Fax Reception

    Contact the network administrator. hostname specified on sender side? • The sender machine displays this error code if the sender fax is a Ricoh model. 7 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the system administrator to increase the bandwidth. Lower the start modem reception baud rate on the receiving side.

  • Page 965: Cannot Receive By Voip Gateway

    Internet Fax) Did gatekeeper install correctly? Contact the network administrator. • The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model. Power to Gatekeeper switched on? Contact the network administrator. The sender machine displays this error •...
  • Page 966 Enable H.323 SW is set to on? Request the sender to check the settings. User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0/SW 34 bit 1 Only if the remote sender fax is a Ricoh • fax. Local fax IP address registered? Register the IP address.

  • Page 967: Service Tables

    Beforehand 4. SERVICE TABLES 4.1 BEFOREHAND • Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off. The main power LED lights or flashes while the ADF is open, while the main machine •...

  • Page 968: Service Tables

    Service Tables 4.2 SERVICE TABLES 4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES) Bit Switches Mode No. Function 101 System Switch 001 – 00 – Change the bit switches for system settings for the fax option See "Bit Switches - 1" 102 Ifax Switch 001 –...

  • Page 969: Sp3-Xxx (Machine Set)

    Service Tables 4.2.3 SP3-XXX (MACHINE SET) Mode No. Function 101 Service Station Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station. 102 Serial Number Enter the fax unit’s serial number. 103 PSTN-1 Port Settings Select Line Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line. If the machine is installed on a PABX line, select “PABX”, “PABX(GND)”...

  • Page 970: Sp5-Xxx (Ram Clear)

    Service Tables 4.2.5 SP5-XXX (RAM CLEAR) Mode Function 101 Initialize SRAM (except Secure) Initializes the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the SRAM, files in the SAF memory, and clock. 102 Erase All Files Erases all files stored in the SAF memory. 103 Reset Bit Switches (except Secure) Resets the bit switches and user parameters.

  • Page 971: Sp7-Xxx (Tests)

    Service Tables feature. 106 Journal Print out 001 All Journals The machine prints all the communication records on the report. 002 Specified Date The machine prints all communication records after the specified date. 107 Log List Print out 001 All log files These log print out functions are for designer use only.

  • Page 972: Bit Switches - 1

    Bit Switches – 1 4.3 BIT SWITCHES – 1 Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may • cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local regulations.
  • Page 973 Bit Switches – 1 The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after "L" indicates the rx level. The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by -16 to get the rx level. In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256. So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB Not used Do not change this setting.
  • Page 974 Bit Switches – 1 MH: MH compression JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode) JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode) Communication ECM: With ECM mode NML: With no ECM Width and reduction A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line 5: 5 ms/line...
  • Page 975 Bit Switches – 1 Printing dedicated tx 1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is printed with parameters on Quick/Speed the dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes each). Dial Lists The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed dedicated tx 0: Disabled parameters;...
  • Page 976 Bit Switches – 1 dump list switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1. 0: Print for all communications 1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol 1: Print only when there is a dump list only for communications with errors. communication error NOTE: The memory size is limited.
  • Page 977 Bit Switches – 1 remains the same) possible with this setting. 4-7 Not used Do not change these settings. System Switch 0F (SP No. 1-101-016) No Function Comments Country/area code for This country/area code determines the factory settings of bit functional settings (Hex) switches and RAM addresses.
  • Page 978 Bit Switches – 1 Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB System Switch 11 (SP No. 1-101-018) Function Comments TTI printing position Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information that 0: Superimposed on the page the customer considers to be important (G3 data transmissions).
  • Page 979 Bit Switches – 1 used when the machine is in the Energy Saver mode. 2-3 Not used Do not change these settings. 4-5 Interval for preventing the machine If there is a file waiting for transmission, the machine from entering Energy Saver mode does not go to Energy Saver mode during the selected if there is a pending transmission period.
  • Page 980 Bit Switches – 1 No Function Comments LS RX memory Sets the value to x4KB. When the amount of available memory capacity threshold drops below this setting, RX documents are printed to conserve setting memory. 00-FF (0-1020 Kbyte: Initial setting 0x80 (512 KB) Hex) NOTE: If a customer wants available memory size to be larger, decrease this threshold...
  • Page 981 Bit Switches – 1 transmitted. • This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the report (e.g., no paper). RTI/CSI display priority This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is displayed 0: RTI 1: CSI on the LCD while the machine is communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
  • Page 982 Bit Switches – 1 0: Automatic reset than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automatically 1: Fax unit stops resets itself. 1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the fax unit stops. Cross-Reference Fax SC codes - See "Troubleshooting" D0C5/D0C6/D0C4/D0AP FAX UNIT...

  • Page 983: Bit Switches - 2

    Bit Switches – 2 4.4 BIT SWITCHES – 2 Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may • cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local regulations.
  • Page 984 Bit Switches – 2 400 x 400 Super The Resolution is set for "Bit 2 200 x 400. Fine 600 x 600 Reserve Reserve mm/inch This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission. 0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion) When on (set to "1"), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.
  • Page 985 Bit Switches – 2 0: Prints 1st page only. 1: Prints all pages. Text String for Return Receipt This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the transmission was received normally at the destination. 00: "Dispatched" Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt.
  • Page 986 Bit Switches – 2 Function Comments Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSI of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents. 0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI or CSI is used.
  • Page 987 Bit Switches – 2 When sending Tiff files to the mail/folder destinations, selects the resizing function in the main scan direction. Controls ON/OFF of the function, that fit the Tiff files sent from the fax application, within the standard size. 0: Disabled (not resizing) 1: Enabled (resizing) Not Used (do not change these settings)

  • Page 988: Printer Switches

    Bit Switches – 2 Bit 2 Bit 3 Setting No sign No setting Individual setting Always sign 4-5 Select the signature when sending mail. In response to IEEE2600.1. Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting No sign No setting Individual setting Always sign 6-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
  • Page 989 Bit Switches – 2 example, [*] [2] is printed in the bottom right corner of the 1st page and only a [2] is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page. • This helps the user to identify pages that have been split because the size of the paper is smaller than the size of the document received.
  • Page 990 Bit Switches – 2 1: Disabled 4th paper feed station usage for fax printing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled LCT usage for fax printing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 5-7 Not used Do not change the settings. * This setting can be used for the client-side machine which has no FCU. Printer Switch 03 (SP No.
  • Page 991 Bit Switches – 2 20 mm 155 mm For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper [Maximum reducible length] = [Paper length] + 0.75 x (N x 5mm) Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken place. Bit 6 Bit 5 Setting...
  • Page 992 Bit Switches – 2 Printer Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings) Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) Printer Switch 0E (SP No.
  • Page 993 Bit Switches – 2 0-1* Smoothing feature (0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine receives halftone images from other manufacturers fax machines Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting frequently. Disabled Disabled Enabled Not used Duplex printing 1: The machine always prints received fax messages in duplex 0: Disabled printing mode: 1: Enabled...

  • Page 994: Bit Switches - 3

    Bit Switches – 3 4.5 BIT SWITCHES – 3 Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may • cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local regulations.
  • Page 995 Bit Switches – 3 Closed network (reception) 1: Reception will not go ahead if the polling ID code of 0: Disabled the remote terminal does not match the polling ID code 1: Enabled of the local terminal. This function is only available in NSF/NSS mode.
  • Page 996 Bit Switches – 3 0: Low 1: High page than the threshold, the machine will send a negative response. The Low and High threshold values depend on the sub-scan resolution and are as follows. 100 dpi 6(L) 12(H) 200 dpi 12(L) 24(H) 300 dpi...
  • Page 997 Bit Switches – 3 Remote mode switch Set this bit to ON when you wish to turn on the remote mode (AUTO mode) switch after automatic reception with AUTO mode. 0: Disable 1: Enable (Active) 3-7 Not used Do not change the settings. Communication Switch 05 (SP No.
  • Page 998 Bit Switches – 3 Communication Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 0D (SP No. 1-104-014) Function Comments 0-7 The available memory threshold, 00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes below which ringing detection (and (e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes) therefore reception into memory) is One page is about 24 kbytes.
  • Page 999 Bit Switches – 3 Communication Switch 14 (SP No. 1-104-021) Function Comments Inch-to-mm conversion 0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch format during transmission are transmitted without conversion. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF memory in mm format are transmitted without conversion.
  • Page 1000 Bit Switches – 3 Not used Do not change the settings. Action when there is no box with Change this setting when the customer requires. an F-code that matches the received SUB code 0: Disconnect the line 1: Receive the message (using normal reception mode) Communication Switch 18 (SP No.
  • Page 1001 Bit Switches – 3 Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings) D0C5/D0C6/D0C4/D0AP FAX UNIT...

  • Page 1002: Bit Switches - 4

    Bit Switches – 4 4.6 BIT SWITCHES – 4 Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may • cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local regulations.
  • Page 1003 Bit Switches – 4 output 0: Off 1: On (Forbid output) Not used Do not change this setting. G3 Switch 02 (SP No. 1-105-003) Function Comments G3 protocol mode Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can only communicate used with machines that send T.30-standard frames only.
  • Page 1004 Bit Switches – 4 This bit is not effective in V.34 communications. Modem rate used for the 1: The machine's tx modem rate will fall back before sending next page after receiving a the next page if a negative code is received. This bit is negative code (RTN or PIN) ignored if ECM is being used.
  • Page 1005 Bit Switches – 4 33.6 Other settings - Not used 4-5 Initial modem type for 9.6 k or These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2 7.2 kbps. kbps if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds. Bit 5 Setting V.29...
  • Page 1006 Bit Switches – 4 Bit 7 Types V.27ter V.27ter, V.29 V.27ter, V.29, V.33 V.27ter, V.29, V.17 V.27ter, V.29, V.17, V.34 Other settings - Not used G3 Switch 07 (SP No. 1-105-008) Function Comments 0-1 PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is a signal loss at higher frequencies (tx mode: Internal) because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange.
  • Page 1007 Bit Switches – 4 0: Normal parameter detected when the "Normal parameter: 0" is selected. 1: Specific parameter Not used Do not change the settings. G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings) G3 Switch 0A (SP No.
  • Page 1008 Bit Switches – 4 G3 Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings). G3 Switch 0C (SP No. 1-105-013) Function Comments 0-1 Not used Do not change these settings. 4-5 Select detection of DTMF/DP This setting determines how to detect the signals detection when using remote switch.
  • Page 1009 Bit Switches – 4 Sidaa manual calibration setting 1: manually calibrates for communication with a line 0: Off whose current change occurs such as an optical fiber 1: On line. 5-7 Not used Do not change the settings. D0C5/D0C6/D0C4/D0AP FAX UNIT...

  • Page 1010: Bit Switches - 5

    Bit Switches – 5 4.7 BIT SWITCHES – 5 Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may • cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local regulations.
  • Page 1011 Bit Switches – 5 0: No confirmation, 1: the telephone number from the sender matches the registered Confirmation telephone number in this machine. If this confirmation fails, the line is disconnected. IP Fax Switch 01 (SP No. 1-111-002) Function Comments IP Fax delay level setting Selects the acceptable delay level.
  • Page 1012 Bit Switches – 5 CCM connection When "1" is selected, only the connection call message 0: No CCM connection with H.323 or no tunneled H.245 is transmitted via CCM. 1: CCM connection Message reception selection 0: This answers the INVITE message from the SIP from a non-registered SIP server not registered for the machine.
  • Page 1013 Bit Switches – 5 IP Fax Switch 04 (SP No. 1-111-005) Function Comments TCF error threshold Sets the TCF error threshold level. [00 to 0f] The default is "1111" (0fH). Not used Do not change these settings. IP Fax Switch 05 (SP No. 1-111-006) No.
  • Page 1014 Bit Switches – 5 Other settings - Not used IP Fax Switch 07 (SP No. 1-111-008) No. Function Comments TSI information Adds or does not add TSI information to 0: Not added, 1: Added NSS(S). DCN transmission setting at T1 timeout Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1 0: Not transmitted timeout.
  • Page 1015 0: Use this setting normally. information selection 1: This setting is used only when a customer wants to 0: Declare connect the machine with SIP server + VOIP-GW T38VendorInfo=RICOH provided by AVAYA Inc. 1: Not declare T38VendorInfo=RICOH Not used. Do not change these settings.
  • Page 1016 Bit Switches – 5 IP Fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) IP Fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) IP Fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) IP Fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) IP Fax Switch 0E (SP No.
  • Page 1017 NCU Parameters 4.8 NCU PARAMETERS The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must be changed by RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed using NCU Parameter programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105);...
  • Page 1018 NCU Parameters frequency: range 1, lower limit 04 680574 Acceptable ringing signal SP2-103-005 frequency: range 2, upper limit 05 680575 Acceptable ringing signal SP2-103-006 frequency: range 2, lower limit 06 680576 Number of rings until a call is SP2-103-007 detected The setting must not be zero.
  • Page 1019 NCU Parameters 21 680554 PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation level -N x 0.5 SP2-103-022 after dialling –3.5 See Note C. 22 680555 ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level -dBm x SP2-103-023 after dialling See Note C. A: Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10 pps. If •...

  • Page 1020: Ram Addresses

    RAM Addresses 4.9 RAM ADDRESSES Do not change the settings that are marked as “Not used” or “Read-only.” • 680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only) 680001(H) - Revision number (BCD) 680002(H) - Year (BCD) 680003(H) - Month (BCD) 680004(H) - Day (BCD) 680006 to 680015(H) - Machine’s serial number (16 digits - ASCII) 680016(H) - Language code...
  • Page 1021 RAM Addresses 6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report printout) Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 1: Not used Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 6: Not used...
  • Page 1022 RAM Addresses Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On Bits 3 and 4: Not used Bit 5: Remote control 0: Off, 1: On Bits 6 and 7: Not used 6800D8(H) - User parameter switch 08 (SWUSR_08) Bits 0 and 1: Not used. Bit 2: Authorized reception 0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are accepted.
  • Page 1023 RAM Addresses Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 1st paper feed station Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 2nd paper feed station Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 3rd paper feed station Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 4th paper feed station Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = LCT Other settings Not used...

This manual is also suitable for:

Savin d0c4Savin d0c5Savin d0c6Savin m0bqSavin m0d1

Table of Contents